Seiko IP 6600 Plotter Service Manual

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
IP-6600 Color Ink Jet Printer Maintenance Manual
U00087443802
Seiko I Infotech Inc.
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
U00087444000 U00087444001 U00087443802
February March April
2004 2004 2005
Copyright (c) by Seiko I Infotech Inc. 2005 All rights reserved The information in this manual is subject to change without prior notice.
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
CONTENTS
Section 1 Maintenance Procedure Overview

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Maintenance Procedure Overview Required Tools External Views and Names of Parts Maintenance Space
1-1
1-1 1-2 1-4 1-6
Section 2
Inspection and Maintenance
2-1
Section 3 Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions

3.1 3.2 3.3 Introduction Entering Maintenance Mode Basic Menu Operation 3.3.1 Menu tree 3.3.2 Basic operations and keys 3.4 Menu Operation: Maintenance Mode 3.4.1 MEC. ADJ Menu 3.4.2 H. ADJ. Menu 3.4.3 H. MNTE Menu 3.4.4 RESET Menu 3.4.5 TEST-PRN. Menu 3.4.6 SYSTEM Menu 3.4.7 FEED Menu 3.4.8 MONITOR Menu 3.4.9 DIAG Menu 3.4.10 SETUP Menu 3.4.11 ACTUATOR Menu 3.4.12 FUNCTION Menu 3.4.12.1 System information print 3.4.12.2 Error log print 3.4.12.3 Cleaning history print 3.4.13 COUNTER Menu 3.5 System Information Management 3.6 Heater Panel Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions 3.6.1 Entering maintenance mode 3.6.2 Basic menu operation 3.6.3 Menu items
3-1
3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-11 3-15 3-15 3-19 3-23 3-36 3-37 3-40 3-46 3-47 3-50 3-54 3-55 3-59 3-60 3-60 3-64 3-65 3-66 3-69 3-69 3-69 3-70
Section 4 Troubleshooting (General)
4-1
CONTENTS-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 5 Troubleshooting (Engine and SCSI Controllers)

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 Print Quality Defects Error Message Types Operator Call Errors Warning 5.4.1 Communication errors 5.4.2 Winder timeout 5.5 Service Call Errors 5.5.1 Self-diagnostic errors at power on 5.5.1.1 Internal RAM (0001) 5.5.1.2 SRAM (0002) 5.5.1.3 Flash ROM (0004) 5.5.1.4 PIO (0008) 5.5.1.5 NVRAM 5.5.1.6 FPGA (IPB) (0020) 5.5.1.7 FPGA (ICB) (0040) 5.5.1.8 ASIC CONF (IPB1) (0080) 5.5.1.9 ASIC CONF (ICB1) (0100) 5.5.1.10 SCSI board (0200) 5.5.1.11 SCSI register (0400) 5.5.1.12 DRAM (0200) 5.5.1.13 POWER SUPPLY (+36, +24, +12 V) (800) 5.5.2 Engine error 5.5.2.1 Engine error 1110: GA_ATG block clear error 5.5.2.2 Engine error 1110: GA_ATG DMA error 5.5.2.3 Engine error 112X: Vacuum fan error 5.5.2.4 Engine error 1140: Flash ROM write error 5.5.2.5 Engine error 1150: Home position sensor error 5.5.2.6 Engine error 1160: Wiping error 5.5.2.7 Engine error 1170: Temperature sensor error 5.5.2.8 Engine error 1180: Capping motor error 5.5.2.9 Engine error 119X: VDD2 variable power supply error 5.5.2.10 Engine error 11AX: NVRAM error 5.5.2.11 Engine error 11C0: Cap position error 5.5.2.12 Engine error 11D0: Cooling fan error 5.5.2.13 Engine error 11E0: Long term strage error 5.5.2.14 Engine error 120X: Head drive IC error 5.5.2.15 Engine error 121X: Head temperature error 5.5.2.16 Engine error 1220: Edge sensor error 5.5.2.17 Engine error 123x: Sub-tank sensor error (Full or Half) 5.5.2.18 Engine error 124x: Ink supply sensor error 5.5.2.19 Engine error 125x: Sub-tank supply error 5.5.2.20 Engine error 126x: FFC cable connection error 5.5.2.21 Engine error 1700x: Servo error 5.5.3 System errors 5.6 Engine F/W composition and Version Up 5.6.1 Engine F/W Composition 5.6.2 Engine F/W Version UP 5.7 ASIC Program Composition and Version Up 5.7.1 ASIC Program Composition 5.7.2 ASIC Program Version Up
5-1
5-1 5-4 5-5 5-8 5-10 5-10 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-13 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-17 5-17 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-26 5-26 5-27 5-27 5-28 5-28 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-31 5-33 5-34 5-34 5-35 5-37 5-37 5-37
CONTENTS -4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.8
Upgrading Heater F/W 5.8.1 Heater F/W Composition 5.8.2 How to Upgrade Heater F/W 5.9 Setting During Engine Board (IPB1) Replacement 5.10 Special Power-On Procedure 5.11 Countermeasures for No Error Message 5.12 System Information Setting Operation After Head Replacement 5.13 Heater Errors 5.13.1 Heater error H01: System error 5.13.2 Heater error H02: Relay board error 5.13.3 Heater error H03: F heater temperature error. 5.13.4 Heater error H04: R heater temperature error 5.13.5 Heater error H05: P heater temperature error 5.13.6 Heater error H06: F heater time out error 5.13.7 Heater error H07: 7 R heater time out error 5.13.8 Heater error H08: P heater time out error 5.13.9 Heater error H09: Operation panel switch error 5.13.10 Heater error H10: Zero cross error
5-38 5-38 5-38 5-39 5-44 5-45 5-46 5-47 5-48 5-48 5-48 5-49 5-49 5-49 5-51 5-52 5-54 5-54
Section 6 Troubleshooting (Dryer 64)

6.1 6.2 Error Indication Error Types and Counteractions 6.2.1 Power supply 6.2.2 Fan 6.2.3 Heater 6.2.4 Timer 6.3 Appendix 6.3.1 IP6600 Error Code - Replacement Association Table 6.3.2 Dryer unit 64 Failure Description - Replacement Association Table
6-1
6-1 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-7 6-13 6-15 6-15 6-18
CONTENTS -5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 7 Parts Replacement (Disassembly/Reassembly)

7.1 Reading This Section 7.1.1 Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure 7.2 Names of Parts 7.2.1 Names of parts and layout 7.3 Maintenance Parts Disassembly and Reassembly 7.3.1 Covers and foot assembly 7.3.1.1 Ink cartridge cover (right) switch assembly (Ink cassette cover (front right)) 7.3.1.2 Ink cartridge cover (left) switch assembly (Ink cassette cover (front left)) 7.3.1.3 Interlock microswitch 7.3.1.4 Photo sensor assembly 7.3.1.5 Operation panel assembly, panel cable 7.3.1.6 Heater panel assembly 7.3.1.7 Waste ink bottle sensor 7.3.1.8 Supply pump end sensor 7.3.2 Y drive unit 7.3.2.1 Photo sensor assembly 7.3.2.2 Carriage motor assembly, Bearing (DE-46562) 7.3.2.3 Two-step pulley assembly, synchronizing belt 7.3.2.4 Steel belt (64) 7.3.2.5 Driven pulley assembly 7.3.2.6 Pressure bracket assembly 7.3.2.7 Pressure roller 7.3.2.8 T fence 7.3.2.9 Carriage cable 64 7.3.3 X drive unit 7.3.3.1 Media feed motor assembly and deceleration belt 7.3.3.2 Adsorption fan assembly 7.3.3.3 Paper sensor assembly (front) 7.3.3.4 Paper sensor assembly (rear) 7.3.3.5 Grit roller 7.3.4 Electrical unit 7.3.4.1 Cooling fan assembly 7.3.4.2 Power supply unit 7.3.4.3 Board (PCB-ASSY-IPB1, PCB-ASSY-WIM1, PCB-ASSY-VDD2) 7.3.4.4 Board (PCB-ASSY-RLY) 7.3.5 Carriage assembly, head unit 7.3.5.1 Head cable 64 7.3.5.2 Edge sensor assembly 7.3.5.3 PCB-ASSY-ICB1 7.3.5.4 Head ASSY, Cooling Fan 7.3.5.5 Linear encoder assembly
7-1
7-1 7-1 7-2 7-2 7-11 7-13 7-13 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-15 7-16 7-16 7-17 7-18 7-18 7-18 7-19 7-20 7-21 7-22 7-23 7-24 7-25 7-27 7-27 7-28 7-28 7-29 7-30 7-34 7-34 7-34 7-34 7-35 7-36 7-38 7-39 7-40 7-41 7-46
CONTENTS -6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.6
7.3.7
7.3.8
7.3.9 7.3.10
7.3.11 7.3.12
Wiping unit 7.3.6.1 Wiping unit (64) 7.3.6.2 Cleaner (wiper 64) unit 7.3.6.3 Blade (Wiper rubber 64) 7.3.6.4 Motor (wiper) assembly 7.3.6.5 Switch (wiper) assembly 7.3.6.6 Belt (wiper) Capping unit 7.3.7.1 Capping unit (64) 7.3.7.2 Motor (cap) assembly 7.3.7.3 Timing belt 7.3.7.4 Solenoid 7.3.7.5 Cap assembly 7.3.7.6 Tray (ink) assembly 7.3.7.7 Torque limiter 7.3.7.8 Pump assembly 7.3.7.9 Joint (CAP Sa) Ink cartridge unit 7.3.8.1 Ink box (left/right) assembly, filter assembly (Sa), and pump tube 7.3.8.2 PCB-ASSY-INK 2 Sub tank unit 7.3.9.1 Sub tank unit, full sensor ASSY, half full sensor ASSY. Heater unit 7.3.10.1 Paper guide F (with heater) 7.3.10.2 Paper guide R (with heater) 7.3.10.3 Platen assembly Winder Unit 7.3.11.1 Flange Dryer 64 7.3.12.1 Circuit breaker 7.3.12.2 Relay 7.3.12.3 SSR 7.3.12.4 Power supply unit 7.3.12.5 Timer 7.3.12.6 Thermostat 7.3.12.7 THRM-CBL-ASSY 7.3.12.8 VOLSW-CBL-ASSY 7.3.12.9 FAN-ASSY 7.3.12.10 FAN (EL-BOX) 7.3.12.11 PCB-ASSY-DRY 7.3.12.12 Flange insulator
7-49 7-49 7-50 7-51 7-52 7-53 7-53 7-56 7-56 7-58 7-58 7-59 7-60 7-61 7-62 7-63 7-64 7-65 7-65 7-68 7-69 7-69 7-71 7-71 7-71 7-72 7-73 7-73 7-74 7-74 7-74 7-75 7-75 7-76 7-77 7-77 7-78 7-78 7-79 7-79 7-80
7.3.12.13 Terminal protecting insulator set
7-82
CONTENTS -7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 8 Adjustment
8.1 Steel Belt Tension Adjustment 8.2 Head Cover Plate Adjustment 8.3 Synchronizing Belt (Y Drive Motor Belt) Tension Adjustment 8.4 Deceleration Belt (X Drive Motor Belt) Tension Adjustment 8.5 Wiping Unit Height Adjustment 8.6 Blade Height and Levelness Adjustment 8.7 Wiping Position Correction 8.8 Wiping Unit Belt Adjustment 8.9 Cap Position Correction 8.10 Cap Unit Height Adjustment 8.11 Shield HB Height Adjustment 8.12 Initial Ink Charge/Ink Extraction 8.13 Nozzle Check 8.13.1 Manual cleaning (the same function as the cleaning in the user mode) 8.13.2 Manual Cleaning 8.13.3 Fill Cap 8.13.4 Discharging ink 8.13.5 Cleaning with maintenance liquid cartridge 8.14 Head Drive Voltage Setting 8.15 Ink Head Adjustment Procedure 8.16 Head Position Correction (L and R) 8.17 Head Position Correction (Main) 8.18 Bi-directional Print Position (L) Correction 8.19 Bi-directional Print Position (R) Correction 8.20 Paper Feed Amount Correction 8.20.1 Adjustment using FEED PATTERN 8.21 Head Position Correction (Main scanning direction) 8.22 Side Margin Position Correction (SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ) 8.23 Top Margin Position Correction (SENSOR (TOP) ADJ) 8.24 Appendix
8-1
8-2 8-3 8-4 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-6 8-9 8-10 8-12 8-14 8-15 8-17 8-17 8-18 8-18 8-19 8-19 8-20 8-21 8-31 8-34 8-37 8-40 8-41 8-42 8-45 8-48 8-50 8-52
CONTENTS -8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 9
Operations
System Operation Overview Paper Transport System Carriage Transport System Ink System Print Functions Principle of Head Drive Print Mode IPB1 (Engine Control) Board 9.8.1 Basic configuration 9.8.2 Engine Unit Operation 9.9 Engine Control Firmware 9.9.1 Function blocks 9.9.2 Operation description 9.10 Power Supply Unit 9.10.1 Electrical specifications 9.10.2 Connector specifications 9.10.3 ON/OFF sequence 9.10.4 Others 9.11 Heater Unit 9.11.1 Block Diagram of Heater Unit 9.11.2 Heater System Electric Unit Operations 9.11.3 Heater Firmware 9.11.4 Heater wiring diagram 9.11.5 Wiring Diagram of Heater Unit 9.11.6 Heater Operations 9.12 Dryer 64 Operation Outline 9.13 Electric Configuration of Dryer 64 9.13.1 Electric Unit Operations 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8
9-1
9-1 9-2 9-5 9-7 9-11 9-15 9-16 9-20 9-20 9-21 9-27 9-27 9-26 9-28 9-29 9-29 9-31 9-31 9-32 9-32 9-33 9-34 9-34 9-34 9-35 9-38 9-39 9-40
Appendix
Appendix-1
CONTENTS -9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Figure
Figure 1-1 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-4 Figure 7-1 Figure 7-2 Figure 9-1 Figure 9-2 Figure 9-3 Figure 9-4 Figure 9-5 Figure 9-6 Figure 9-7 Figure 9-8 Figure 9-9 Figure 9-10 Figure 9-11 Maintenance work flowchart External views and names of parts (Front) External views and names of parts (Rear) Maintenance space Cover Names and Layout Cover names and layout (Dryer 64) Outline of operation Transport system mechanism (X axis) Transport system mechanism (Y axis) Ink system overview Ink system concept Head drive principle Basic hardware configuration SCSI/Engine F/W function block Power ON/OFF state transition Principal of dryer 64 operation Block diagram of dryer 64 electric unit 1-1 1-4 1-5 1-6 7-2 7-3 9-1 9-2 9-2 9-7 9-7 9-15 9-20 9-27 9-31 9-38 9-39
CONTENTS -10
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Table
Table 1-1 Table 5-1 Table 7-1 Table 7-2 Table 7-3 Table 7-4 Table 7-5 Table 7-6 Table 7-7 Table 7-8 Table 7-9 Table 7-10 Table 7-11 Table 7-12 Table 7-13 Table 7-14 List of required tools Booting Action List Maintenance part names (Cover) Maintenance parts names (Foot assembly) Maintenance parts names (Y drive unit) Maintenance parts names (X drive unit) Maintenance parts names (Power unit) Maintenance parts names (Carriage head unit) Maintenance parts names (Wiping unit) Maintenance parts names (Capping unit) Maintenance parts names (Ink cartridge unit) Maintenance parts names (Sub tank unit) Maintenance parts names (Winder unit) Maintenance parts names (cables) Maintenance parts names (Jigs) Maintenance parts (Dryer 64) 1-2 5-43 7-4 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-6 7-7 7-7 7-8 7-8 7-9 7-9 7-9 7-10 7-10
CONTENTS -11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Blank page
CONTENTS -12
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 1
Maintenance Procedure Overview
This section describes the primary maintenance procedure, necessary tools and the names of parts of the printer.
1.1
Maintenance Procedure Overview

Maintenance is divided into periodic inspection and maintenance based on a maintenance contract and non-periodic maintenance which is performed when a trouble occurs. A flowchart of each type of maintenance is shown in Figure 1-1.
Start
Periodic inspection and maintenance
Periodic inspection/When a problem occurs
Maintenance that is performed when a problem occurs
Check the state of the plotter (problem, complaint, etc.).
Confirm the details of the problem and the situation in which it occurred.
Check or clean parts. => Section 2 Replace parts if necessary (=> Section 6), or perform adjustment (=> Section 7).
Perform troubleshooting. - If the SCSI controller seems to be defective => Section 5 - General problem or defective print quality => Section 4
Print a drawing to verify that there is no problem.
Replace defective parts. => Section 6 Replace parts or perform adjustment if necessary. => Section 7
End
Verify that the problem has been eliminated.
End
Figure 1-1
Maintenance work flowchart
1-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
1.2
Required Tools
Table 1-1 lists the tools and measuring equipment required for maintenance.
Table 1-1 List of required tools (1/2)

Name Phillips screwdriver (2 bits) Phillips screwdriver (1 bit) Phillips torque driver (2 bits) Stabilized screwdriver (2 bits) Normal screwdriver Normal precision screwdriver Hexagonal bar spanner Spanner or long-nose pliers Nippers Tester Metal scale (JIS 1 class precision) Tube cutter Cutter knife Cable binder Magnifier with scale (M830-S or equivalent) Quanitity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Remarks Commercially available product Encoder removal, commercially available product Head unit installation (5 kg), commercially available product Commercially available product For removing E rings, commercially available product For removing E rings, commercially available product Commercially available product For removing E rings, commercially available product Commercially available product For power supply voltage measurement, commercially available product For head unit adjustment, 300 mm or more, commercially available product Commercially available product Commercially available product Commercially available product Peak statt microscope x 100: No. 2008-100 (Scale: standard) For unit installation environment check, commercially available product Tow cosing Asia EM-60L or equivalent (Silicon grease can be substituted.) Fujitsu: MB98A81183-15 (U00045781700) Fujisoku: JF4096A3-R06A (U00055389300) For ink stain protection Commercially available product For ink stain clraning, kim wipe or equivalent For cleaning front down surface of the carriage
Thermometer and hygrometer Synchronous belt, deceleration belt grease IC card for rewriting engine F/W ROM Gloves or finger sack Cleaning paper Wipe stick
1 1 1 1 set As required As required
1-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 1 Maintenance Procedure Overview
Table 1-1 List of required tools (2/2)

Name Cleaning Liquid 200 g (1.96 N) push/pull spring scale 10 kg (98 N) push/pull spring scale 1 kg (9.8 N) push/pull spring scale Clearance gauge Platen squareness/height adjustment jig Quanitity As required 1 1 1 1 1 Ethanol - SUS belt tension adjustment (push) - X motor belt tension adjustment (pull) - Y motor belt tension adjustment (pull) - Pressure roller grip power measurement (pull) 0.20.5mm - Platen squareness adjustment - Platen height (level) adjustment - Wiping unit height adjustment - Carriage height adjustment - Carriage parallelism adjustment Head incliration and position adjustment Y rail cover mounting screw removal Daily maintenance kit Daily maintenance kit Daily maintenance kit Daily maintenance kit Remarks
Carriage (head base) height adjustment jig Head position adjustment jig Head positioning pin (short) Head positioning pin (long) Head positioning reference plate Head positioning reference jig 1 Head positioning reference jig 2 - screw driver (short) + screw driver (long) Offset latchet screwdriver Cap cleaning liquid Wiper cleaning liquid Cleaning swab Syringes Maintenance liquid cartridge Dammy cartridge Cleaning liquid cartridge
1 1 set 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 set 1 set 1 set 1 set 1 set 6 6 6
1-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
1.3
External Views and Names of Parts

The externals and names of parts of the printer are shown in Figures 1-2 and 1-3.
<Front of the printer>
Ink cartridge
Roll paper
Lock
Unlock
Operation panel Heater control panel Ink holder Flange Caster Paper pressure alternation lever Pressure roller up/down lever Paper-out release lever
The lamps and LCD, which indicate the printer status, and keys for setting functions are located on the operation panel. The keys for setting heater temperature are located on the heater control panel. Holds the ink cartridge. Sets paper roll. Unlocks the caster to move the printer, and lock it to secure the printer. Alternates paper pressure depending on the paper thickness. Presses down the paper after inserting the paper into the paper supplying part and releases the pressing down of the paper. (ME lever) Releases paper-out detection sensor.
Figure 1-2
External views and names of parts (Front)
1-4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 1 Maintenance Procedure Overview
<Rear of the printer>
Winding roll
SCSI controller Network controller
Power receptacle Printer switch Rear cover SCSI connector ID switch Terminator switch Paper outlet Waste ink bottle
Printer power supply
Power receptacle Heater switch 100 V/200 V alternation switch Cap cover
Heater power supply
SCSI controller
21
22
Wiper cover Print stop/restart, cancel keys 23 FAN guard slide lever 24 Head up/down lever
Figure 1-3
External views and names of parts (Rear)
1-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
1.4
Maintenance Space
The space required for maintaining the plotter is shown in Figure 1-4.
400
1000
400
(Front)
1000
Height direction: 1700 (Unit: mm)
Figure 1-4
Maintenance space
1-6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 2
Inspection and Maintenance
We recommend that maintenance and inspection should be performed to keep the printer performance in the best condition. The maintenance mode is used to carry out maintenance and inspection. Parts should be adjusted and checked as required during inspection and maintenance. The following inspection and maintenance procedures must be followed: Maintenance mode menu operations and functions : Section 3 Troubleshooting: Sections 4, 5 and 6 Replacement parts information and disassembly/reassembly procedures: Adjustment: Section 8 Section 7
Details of inspection and maintenance are described in the subsequent pages.
2-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Daily inspection and maintenance

The wiper sponge needs to be dampened periodically. Keep it damp by replenishing a dropping pipet full of wiper cleaning fluid.
1 Capping Unit Cleaning

Enter to the SERVICE menu and select CAP CLEANING on the operation panel.
#CAP CLEANING >
The head carriage will move to the wiper side and you can access easily to the capping unit.
Rear cover
Carriage cover
Open the rear cover and cap cover. Wipe up the edge and periphery of the upper surface of
all (six) caps with the cotton swab.
Clean he edge and periphery of the upper surface of the cap.
Close the cap cover and rear cover. The head carriage will return to the capping unit position (home position) automatically.
NOTE
- Do not leave the printer for long time in the condition that the head carriage is not on the capping unit.
2-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 2 Inspection and Maintenance
2 Wiper Blade Cleaning

Enter to the SERVICE menu and select WIPE CLEANING on the operation panel.
#WIPER CLEANING >
The wiper blade will come up for cleaning.
Open the rear cover and the wiper cover.
Rear cover
Wiper cover
Clean the front and back of the blades with the swab infiltrated into the wiper cleaning liquid. After completion of the cleaning, close the wipe cover and the rear cover to return the
wiper to the position as it was.
Wiper blades
2-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Wiper sponge cleaning

The wiper sponge needs to be dampened periodically. Keep it damp by replenishing a dropping pipet full of wiper cleaning fluid.
Wiper sponge Syringe
4 Test Print
Enter to the ADJUST menu and select TEST PRINT on the operation panel. Check no print dot-off and missing. Perform the test print as the 1st time print on every day and especially after cap cleaning for head cleaning. When the print dot-off occurs at test print, enter to the CLEANING menu and select SLIGHT. (NORMAL for the engine F/W V1.**)
NOTE
- Do not leave the head carriage at the position other than on the capping unit for a long time (more than 5 minutes).
5 Waste Ink Bottle Disposal

Pour the waste ink into the proper container you prepared and make the waste ink bottle empty.
Every one month inspection and maintenance 1 Head Cleaning

Clean the head one time per a month according to the documentation attached to the head cleaner kit.
When leaving the printer for a long time (more than 2 weeks) in power off state
Store the printer after cleaning the head and ink path with the maintenance liquid and charging the maintenance liquid. Six maintenance liquid cartridges and six dummy cartridges are mandatory. Use the storage kit (IP6-137). The storage kit contains 6 maintenance fluid cartridges (IP6-107) and 6 dummy cartridges (IP6-118). All of six maintenance fluid cartridges should be used for one service clean operation.
2-4
1 Checking waste ink bottle

Empty the waste ink bottle.
2 Service Clean
Enter to the SERVICE menu and select SERVICE CLEAN.
#SERVICE >SERVICE CLEAN
Upon completion of service clean, turn off the power with the maintenance fluid cartridge mounted, and leave the printer for a while. The head wash operation is mandatory when returning the printer from the status that the service clean is performed.
NOTE
When the printer is left turned off for more than one month (31 days), the flag needs to be cleared to prevent engine error 11E0. The flag is cleared by entering the maintenance mode. <Entering the Engine Maintenance mode> 1. Turn on the power by pressing the POWER key while pressing down and . MAINTENANCE MODE PASSWORD ?
2. Press the screen.
, and
keys in order in the password input
3. Turn off the power. 4. Turn on the power in the normal procedure. When the printer is left for a prolonged period of time without the maintenance fluid being replenished, the ink will dry up and harden in the ink supply pump, tubes, or caps. Be sure to refill the maintenance fluid. Opening or closing the rear cover or levers should be avoided while service clean is in progress, or the operation may have to be restarted from the beginning, resulting in the waste of maintenance fluid. If service clean is to be restarted, new maintenance fluid cartridges are required.
When returning the printer from a long time leaving (more than 2 weeks)
Perform the cleaning of the head and ink path with cleaning liquid. Six cleaning liquid cartridges and six dummy cartridges are mandatory. Use the cleaning kit (IP6-117). The cleaning kit contains 6 cleaning fluid cartridges (IP6-119) and 6 dummy cartridges (IP6-118). All of six cleaning fluid cartridges should be used for one head wash operation.
2-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

2 Head Wash
Select HEAD WASH in SERVICE menu on the operation panel.
#SERVICE >HEAD WASH
NOTE
The printer performs fill cap operation to keep the good head condition at first 20 hours after print wait state and every 3 days. It is recommended to keep the printer ON except when the printer is not used for a long time. Avoid leaving the printer with no ink for one month or more for head protection. When the printer is left for a prolonged period of time without maintenance fluid being replenished, the ink will dry up and harden in ink supply pump, tubes, or caps. Check hardened ink when restarting printer. If the ink hardened, wash it out or replace the part containing hardened ink prior to head wash. Carry out daily maintenance prior to head wash. The wiper sponge may harden by waste ink. Apply 5 pipets of wiper cleaning fluid in the day before the head wash operation. Do not open and close the rear cover and do not lift and push down the levers during service cleaning and head washing. If doing so, the printer may start service cleaning and head washing from the beginning. After performing the head wash, charge the ink (See Ink Charge after Head Washing). the the the the
3 Ink Charge After Head Washing

Charge the ink after head washing before printing when the printer is leaved for a long time. Enter to SERVICE menu and select INK CHARGE on the operation panel.
#SERVICE >INK CHARGE
Insert the ink cassettes and charge the ink. Leave the printer for at least one hour after completion of ink charging. And then perform the test print. When the print dot-off is found in the test print, select SLIGHT in the Cleaning menu (NORMAL for the engine F/W V1.**)..
2-6
NOTE
Approximately 200 cc of ink is filled in one ink charge operation. If the ink level of the cartridge mounted is lower than 250 cc, replacement is indicated. Mount a cartridge containing more than 250 cc (25%, or 50% for the starter kit).
When returning the printer from a long time leaving (within 2 weeks) in power off state.

2 Head Wash
Perform the cleaning of the head and ink path with cleaning liquid. Six cleaning liquid cartridges and six dummy cartridges are mandatory. Use the cleaning kit (IP6-117) for head wash. The cleaning kit contains 6 cleaning fluid cartridges (IP6-119) and 6 dummy cartridges (IP6-118). All of six cleaning fluid cartridges should be used for one head wash operation.
#SERVICE >HEAD WASH
After performing the head wash, charge the ink.
NOTE
FILL CAP is performed after 20 hours since the printer moves to standby to keep the good head condition. After that, FILL CAP is carried out every three days. When the maintenance fluid is not replenished for a prolonged period of time, the ink will dry up and harden in the ink supply pump, tube, or cap. Be sure to refill the maintenance fluid when restarting the printer. If ink hardened inside these parts, wash it out or replace the parts. Carry out daily maintenance prior to head wash. The wiper sponge may harden by waste ink. Apply 5 pipets of wiper cleaning fluid in the day before the head wash operation. Do not open and close the rear cover and do not lift and push down the levers during service cleaning and head washing. If doing so, the printer may start service cleaning and head washing from the beginning.
2-7
(Blank Page)
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 3
Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions
3.1
Introduction
The operation panel functions of this printer are divided as follows: - User mode: operation panel functions used by general users - Maintenance mode: operation panel functions used for factory adjustment and field maintenance The heater panel functions of this printer are described in 3.7 Heater Panel Maintenance Mode Menu and Functions. This section describes only the operations in the maintenance mode for factory adjustment and field maintenance. For information on the operations in the user mode for general users, see the User's Guide.
3-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.2
Entering Maintenance Mode

The maintenance mode is designed for factory adjustment and field maintenance by maintenance personnel. There are two methods to enter the maintenance mode. (1) When the interface board (controller) is mounted. Press the , , , and keys in this order in the offline user mode, and enter the password to enter the maintenance mode.
(2) When the interface board (controller) is not mounted. (engine start) The maintenance mode is invoked by entering the password.
<When the interface board is not mounted>
<When the interface board is mounted>
* Passwards for operaters

Operater Field service personnel Password
Press the
and
keys in this order.
3-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 3 Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions
3.3
Basic Menu Operation

There are the following menu groups in the engine maintenance mode, and they can be switched by pressing the key.
The menu has the following hierarchical structure:
<Menu group> This menu is displayed at the first level. Some menus have several sub-menus.
<Second-level and third-level menus> Sub-menus of the menu group
<Parameters> Select a selected menu item or enter a value. There are three methods: choice input, value entry, and execution.
3-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.3.1
Menu tree
Second-level menu ADJUST PATTERN Third-level menu Parameter Choice input - TOP & BTM ADJ - FEED ADJ Choice input - ROUGH (NORMAL) - ROUGH (H-QUAL) - ROUGH (H-DENS) - ROUGH (DRAFT) - DETAIL (NORMAL) - DETAIL (H-QUAL) - DETAIL (H-DENS) - DETAL (DRAFT) - DETAIL2 (NORMAL) - DETAIL2 (H-QUAL) - DETAIL2 (H-DENS) - DETAIL2 (DRAFT) Execution Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry
Top menu
((first-level menu)
FEED PATTERN
MEC. ADJ
CHECK PATTERN CAP POSITION WIPE POSITION SENSOR (TOP) ADJ SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ
FEED ADJUST
BASE PAPER (*1) Glossy (*1) Matte (*1) Banner (*1) BLT_B (*1)
BACK PATTERN BASE
PAPER (*1)
BACK ADJUST
Glossy (*1)
Matte (*1) Banner (*1) BLT_B (*1)
H ADJ PATTERN
H. ADJ.
MOVE CARRIAGE
- NORMAL - H-QUALITY - H-DENSITY - DRAFT Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Choice input NOZZLE - HEAD ADJ1 - HEAD ADJ2 - LEFT/RIGHT - HEAD POS - HEAD POS L - HEAD POS R - ADJ 1-1 - ADJ 1-2 - ADJ 1-3 - ADJ 2-1 - ADJ 2-1 Choice input - HOME - CAP - CENTER - WIPE
3-4
Top menu (first-level menu)
Second-level menu
Third-level menu Bk Lm Lc Y M C Lm Lc Y M C
Parameter Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry - BASE - PAPER - Glossy - Matte - Banner - BLT-B
(*1)
L-R ADJ
H-POS. ADJ.
SELECT I-POS
Bk Lm Lc I-POS (L) XXXXXX (*2)

H. ADJ.
Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Execution
Y M C Bk Lm Lc
I-POS (R) XXXXXX (*2)
Y M C Bk (L) Bk (R) Lm (L) Lm (R) Lc (L) Lc (R)
DRIVE VOLTAGE
Y (L) Y (R) M (L) M (R) C (L) C (R)
LINE WIDTH CHECK PATTERN
(*1) The registered media names are displayed (registered media other than the preset ones are also listed). (*2) XXXXXX is the medium name selected in the I-POS selection.
3-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Second-level menu INK CHARGE INK EXTRACT SERVICE
Third-level menu -
Parameter Choice input - ALL - LEFT - RIGHT Choice input - ALL - LEFT - RIGHT Choice input - SERVICE CLEAN 1 - SERVICE CLEAN 2 - HEAD WASH Choice input - ON - OFF Choice input - NOT YET - FINISHED Choice input - NORMAL - SLIGHT - STRONG Execution Execution Execution Choice input - UNI - BI Choice input - ON - OFF Choice input - ON - OFF Choice input - ON - OFF Choice input - ON - OFF Choice input - ON - OFF Choice input - ON - OFF Choice input - 070410 - 070810 - 070811 - 030210 Value entry Value entry Color, line length, and pages are defined separatrly. Color, line length, and pages are defined separatrly. -
H. MNTE
AUTO CLEANING INK CHAGE MODE CLEANING CAP OPEN CAP CLOSE
EXECUTE DIRECTION Bk C M Y
RESET
PATTERN 0 Lc Lm
TEST-PRN
MODE
PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 PATTERN 3 PATTERN 4 PATTERN 5 PATTERN 6 PATTERN 7 PATTERN 8 PATTERN 9 PATTERN 10 PATTERN 11 PATTERN 12
LENGTH COUNT - Same as PATTERN 0 - Same as PATTERN 0 - Same as PATTERN 0 - Same as PATTERN 0 - Same as PATTERN 0 - Same as PATTERN 0 - Same as PATTERN 0 - Same as PATTERN 0 - Same as PATTERN 0 - Same as PATTERN 0 - Same as PATTERN 0 - Same as PATTERN 0
3-6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 3 Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions Top menu (first-level menu)
Second-level menu LANGUAGE
Third-level menu -
Parameter Choice input - ENGLISH - JAPANESE Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Value entry Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display)
SYSTEM DATE SYSTEM TIME SERIAL NO. NVRAM INIT SAVE SETTING RESTORE SETTING
SYSTEM
EDGE FEED EXIT HOME POSITION WIPE LEVER INTERLOCK-L INTERLOCK-R HEAD END INK1 ON INK2 ON INK3 ON INK4 ON
SAVE NVRAM RESTORE NVRAM BOOT VERSION F/W VERSION IPB VERSION WIM VERSION ICB VERSION ASIC VERSION HEAT HW VERSION HEAT FW VERSION F/W VERSION -
FEED
ENGINE SENSOR
MONITOR
INK SENSOR
INK5 ON INK6 ON INK COVER-L INK COVER-R
3-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Second-level menu
Third-level menu FULL1 FULL2 FULL3 FULL4 FULL5 FULL6 HALF1 HALF2 HALF3
Parameter Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display) Execution (Display)
SUB TANK SENSOR
HALF4 HALF5 HALF6 INK SUPPLY1 INK SUPPLY2 INK SUPPLY3 INK SUPPLY4 INK SUPPLY5 INK SUPPLY6
WASTE BOTTLE
INSTALL SLACK
WIND UNIT
SWITCH1 SWITCH2 ENV. HEAD 1 HEAD 2 HEAD 3 HEAD 4 HEAD 5 HEAD 6
THERMISTOR
CRG 1 CRG 2 CRG 3 CRG 4 CRG 5 CRG 6 CRG 7
3-8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 3 Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions Top menu (first-level menu)
Second-level menu FLASH ROM PI0 NVRAM CARRIAGE I/F INK EEPROM SCSI DATA ATG DRAM RSM PTC PDD ALL VDD
Third-level menu 24V 17V 6V DISPLAY KEY Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution
Parameter
DIAG
PANEL POWER SAVE

SETUP
SCSI DRIVER
-
MOVE CARRIAGE
PF MOTOR
PUMP MOTOR
WIPE MOTOR PUMP SOLENOID 1

ACTUATOR
PUMP SOLENOID 2 FAN MOTOR 1 FAN MOTOR 2 FAN MOTOR 3 COOL FAN HEAD COOL FAN WIND MOTOR
Execution (Display) Input Choice input - ON - OFF Choice input - NORMAL - COMPATIBLE Choice input - HOME - CAP - CENTER - WIPE Choice input - FORWARD - OFF - REWIND Choice input - STOP - NORMAL - REVERSE Choice input - STOP - NORMAL - REVERSE Choice input - OFF - ON Choice input - OFF - ON Choice input - OFF - ON Choice input - OFF - ON Choice input - OFF - ON Choice input - OFF - ON Choice input - OFF - ON Choice input - OFF - ON
3-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Second-level menu
Third-level menu
-
Parameter Choice input - STOP - NORMAL - REVERSE Choice input - STOP - NORMAL - REVERSE Choice input - STOP - NORMAL - REVERSE Choice input - STOP - NORMAL - REVERSE Choice input - STOP - NORMAL - REVERSE Choice input - STOP - NORMAL - REVERSE Choice input - OFF - ON Execution Execution Execution Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry Value entry
ISM1
-
ISM2
-
ISM3
-
ISM4
-
ISM5
-
ISM6
WIND MOTOR SYSTEM PRINT

FUNCTION -
ERROR LOG PRINT HISTRY PRINT MACHINE COUNT
COUNTER
PAPER COUNT A3 PAPER COUNT A2 PAPER COUNT A1 PAPER COUNT A0 PAPER COUNT 36"
3-10
3.3.2
Basic operations and keys Operation panel key functions are listed in the table below.
First-level (Top menu)
Key
Second-level Transfers to the online state (When the state rturns to the offline after transfering to the online, the state will be in top menu.) X X
Third-level Transfers to the online state (When the state rturns to the offline after transfering to the online, the state will be in top menu.) X X Determines the menu and transfers to the parameter settings. Returns to the second-level.
Parameter settings Transfers to the online state (When the state rturns to the offline after transfering to the online, the state will be in top menu.) X The state returns to the third-level or the cecond-level. Determines the parameter or executes the action. Choice inpt: X Execution: X Vale entry: Moving a digit Choice inpt: X Execution: X Vale entry: Moving a digit Selects a same level menu. (Parameter) Selects a same level menu (Parameter). Transfers to the shut down state.
Transfers to the online state
Changes the menu group X (*1)
Selects a menu
Returns to the first-level.
Selects a menu
Goes to third-level
Selects a menu Selects a menu Transfers to the shut down state.
Selects a same level menu. Selects a same level menu.
Remote power off
Selects a same level menu. Selects a same level menu. Transfers to the shut down state.
(*1) : x indicates an invalid key.
(1)
Menu group selection - Select a menu group directly with , , , and key. keys.
- Switch between menu group screens with the (2) Menu selection (3) , , keys: key: key:
Change between menus at the same level. Change menu levels. The key moves to a higher-level menu, and the key, to a lower-level menu. Select a menu to change parameters.
Parameter setting or change , , keys: keys: Switch between parameters. Increment or decrement a value when it is entered. Shift digit when entering a value.
(4)
Parameter setting or canceling: key: Determine a parameter.
3-11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(5) Setting save
key:
Cancel an input parameter value and return to menu selection.
- Changes are automatically saved in parameters. (6) End of setting - When the key is pressed, the printer goes back to online mode.
3-12
For information on two-level choice input, value input, and execution operation procedures,see the Section 3, Menu Operations, of the User's Guide. This section explains the three-level menu structure. <Example: If the parameter of the third-level menu structure is value entry type> The PAPER FEED ADJ. menu on the MEC. ADJ menu is given as an example. (1) Select a menu group with with key.
H. ADJ. H. M NTE RESET
MEC. ADJ
keys. Select MEC. ADJ menu
(2) Select a second-level menu group with VOLTAGE here.
keys. Select DRIVE
# DRIVE VOLTAGE # Lm (R)
(3) Press
key to move to the third-level menu. , keys. Select Lm (R) here.
Select a third-level menu item with
# DRIVE VOLTAGE # Lm (R) > 17.0 V
(4)
Press
key to change parameters. Select Lm (R) here.
* 17.0 V
(5) Move to the digit to be modified with

keys.
* 17.0 V
(6) Press
keys to modify the digit.
# DRIVE VOLTAGE # Lm (R) * 17.2 V
(7) Press
key to change the parameter value and return to the condition in (3).
* 17.2 V
Note:
indicates that the part blinks inversely.
3-13
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
<Display format: The second-level format (The first-level - the third-level parameter setting)>
# The third-level menu > Parameter
Note: The top of the parameter becomes ">" (setting display state) or "*" (changeable state).
<Display format: The third-level format (The first-level - the third-level parameter setting)>
# The second-level menu # The third-level menu>parameter
Note 1: Note 2:
The top of the parameter becomes ">" (setting display state) or "*" (changeable state). The lower column consists of the third-level menu display: 8 characters (include ">".) (When the third-level menu consists of more than 8 characters, ">" position is shifted back.)
3-14
3.4
3.4.1
Menu Operation: Maintenance Mode

MEC. ADJ Menu
Sets mechanical adjustment parameters.
MEC. ADJ
H. A DJ RESET
H.MNTE
When the (1)
key is pressed, mechanical adjustment parameters can be set.
Adjustment pattern print (ADJUST PATTERN) Prints an adjustment pattern to be used for mechanical adjustment.
# ADJUST PATTERN > TOP & BOTTOM
<Parameters (choice input)> - TOP & BTM ADJ (2) Feed Pattern (FEED PATTERN)
: Top & bottom adjustment pattern
Prints an adjustment pattern to be used for paper feed adjustment.
# FEED PATTERN > ROUGH1 (NORMAL)
<Parameters (choice input)> - ROUGH (NORMAL) - ROUGH (H-QUAL) - ROUGH (H-DENS) - ROUGH (DRAFT) - DETAIL (NORMAL)
- DETAIL (H-QUAL)
- DETAIL (H-DENS)
- DETAIL (DRAFT)
- DETAIL2 (NORMAL) - DETAIL2 (H-QUAL) - DETAIL2 (H-DENS) - DETAIL2 (DRAFT)
: Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.25% in 99.0 to 101.1% range. (Standard 4-pass print) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.25% in 99.0 to 101.1% range. (High quality 8-pass print) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.25% in 99.0 to 101.1% range. (High density 8-pass print) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.25% in 99.0 to 101.1% range. (Draft 2-pass print) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.06% in the current setting value 0.12% range. (Standard 4-pass print) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.06% in the current setting value 0.12% range. (High quality 8-pass print) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.06% in the current setting value 0.12% range. (High density 8-pass print) : Prints the paper feed adjustment pattern every 0.06% in the current setting value 0.12% range. (Draft 2-pass print) : Prints the same pattern as DETAIL (NORMAL) 's. One pattern is printed longer than DETAIL (NORMAL) 's. : Prints the same pattern as DETAIL (H-QUAL) 's. One pattern is printed longer than DETAIL (H-QUAL) 's. : Prints the same pattern as DETAIL (H-DENS) 's. One pattern is printed longer than DETAIL (H-DENS) 's. : Prints the same pattern as DETAIL (DRAFT) 's. One
3-15
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
pattern is printed longer than DETAIL (DRAFT) 's.
Note) Use ROUGH (NORMAL), DETAIL (NORMAL) or DETAIL2 (NORMAL) for adjustments in high speed mode. (3) Check pattern (CHECK PATTERN) Prints a check pattern.
# CHECK PATTERN >
<Parameter (Execution)> None (4) Cap position correction value (CAP POSITION) Inputs a correction value for the capping unit position.
# CAP POSITION > +0.0 mm
<Parameter (Value input)> +X.Xmm (-5.0 to +5.0mm) (5) Wiping position correction value (WIPE POSITION) Inputs a correction value for the wiping unit position.
# WIPE POSITION > +0.0 mm
<Parameter (Value input)> X.Xmm (-5.0 to +5.0mm)
(6)
Top margin position correction value (SENSOR (TOP) ADJ) Inputs a correction value for the top margin position according to the print results of the top & bottom adjustment pattern.
# SENSOR (TOP) ADJ > +0.0 mm
<Parameter (Value input)> X.Xmm (-5.0 to +5.0mm) (7) Side margin position correction value (SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ) Inputs a correction value for the side margin position according to the print results of the top & bottom adjustment pattern.
# SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ > +0.0 mm
<Parameter (Value input)> X.Xmm (-5.0 to +5.0mm)
3-16
(8)
Paper feed correction value (FEED ADJ (BASE)) Inputs a correction value for the base media.
# FEED ADJ > BASE >099 .80%
<Sab-menus> # BASE
Inputs a basical correction value for media feed. The correction value is reflected to the preset media's feeding. (It does not affect the deleted media.)
Note: Preset media can be changed by the user. Use this setting only for manufacturing process. # PAPER # Glossy # Matte # Banner # BLT_B Note: : : : : : Inputs a correction value for PAPER feeding. Inputs a correction value for Glossy feeding. Inputs a correction value for Matte feeding. Inputs a correction value for Banner feeding. Inputs a correction value for BLT_B feeding.
The registered media name is displayed for the media name. The number of selections changes according to registration and delection of media.
<Parameter (Value input)> xxx.xx% (097.00 to 103.00%) (9) Media back feed adjustment pattern Prints for adjustmenting the media back feed..
# BACK PATTERN > NORMAL
<Parameters (choice input)> - NORMAL : Prints by the standard 4-pass print - H-QUAL : Prints by the high quality 8-pass print - H-DENS : Prints by the high density 8-pass print - DRAFT : Prints by the draft 2-pass print
Note)
Use NORMAL for adjustments in high-speed mode.
(10) Paper back feed correction (unit: pulse) Inputs a media back feed correction value. Inputs a correction value based on the media back feed adjustment pattern.
# BACK ADJUST > BASE >+0000
<Sab-menus> # BASE
: Inputs a basical correction value for media back feed. The correction value is reflected to the preset media's feeding.
Note:
Use this setting only for manufacturing process.
# PAPER # Glossy # Matte
: : :
Inputs a correction value for PAPER. Inputs a correction value for Glossy. Inputs a correction value for Matte.
3-17
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
# Banner # BLT_B
: :
Inputs a correction value for Banner. Inputs a correction value for BLT_B.
Note:
<Parameter (Value input)> 2000P (5 mm) 1 pulse = 2.5 m
3-18
3.4.2
H. ADJ. Menu
Sets head adjustment parameters.
MEC. ADJ
H. A DJ RESET
H.MNTE
When the (1)
key is pressed, head adjustment parameters can be adjusted.
Head adjustment pattern print (H ADJ PATTERN) Prints an adjustment pattern to be used for head adjustment. Press the key during print to stop the printing.
# H ADJ PATTERN > NOZZLE OK?
<Parameter (Choice entry)> - NOZZLE - HEAD ADJ1 - HEAD ADJ2 - LEFT/RIGHT - HEAD POS - HEAD POS - INK POS R - ADJ1-1 - ADJ1-2 - ADJ1-3 - ADJ2-1 - ADJ2-2
: : : : : : : : : : : :
Prints a nozzle check pattern. Prints a head adjustment pattern. Prints a head adjustment check pattern. Prints a left/right position adjustment pattern. Prints a head position adjustment pattern. Prints a head position adjustment pattern. Prints a reciprocating adjustment pattern R. Prints an left/right position adjustment pattern of HEAD ADJ1. Prints an inter-head position adjustment pattern of HEAD ADJ1. Prints a reciprocating adjustment pattern of HEAD ADJ1. Prints phase, left/right, and inter-head adjustment patterns of HEAD ADJ2. Prints a reciprocating adjustment pattern of HEAD ADJ2.
(2)
Carriage movement (MOVE CARRIAGE) Used to move the carriage when adjusting an installed head. Cap=Move the carriage to the cap position (do not perform capping).
# MOVE CARRIAGE > HOME
<Parameter (Choice entry)> - HOME : Detects home position and move the carriage to the home position. - CAP : Moves the carriage to the capping position. - CENTER : Moves the carriage to the center. - WIPE : Moves the carriage to the wiping position.
3-19
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(3)
Head right and left correction value (L-R ADJ) Adjusts the right and left nozzle position of each head. Inputs a correction value according to the print results of the head adjustment pattern.
# L-R ADJ # BK >+00 & A
<Sub-menus> (Display order of color pallet) - # Bk : Inputs a correction value for the right and left position of Bk head. - # Lm : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lm head. - # Lc : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lc head. -#M : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the M head. -#Y : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Y head. -#C : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the C head. <Parameter (Value input)> - +00: -32 to +31 (Unit: 1 dot) - A: A to H (Unit: 1/8 dot) [Common to all menus] (4) Head position correction value (H-POS. ADJ.) Adjusts the head position in the main scanning direction of each head. Input a correction value according to the print results of the head adjustment pattern.
# H-POS ADJ # Lm >+00 & A
<Sub-menus> (Display order of color pallet) - # Lm : Inputs a correction value for the Lm head position. - # Lc : Inputs a correction value for the Lc head position. -#M : Inputs a correction value for the M head position. -#Y : Inputs a correction value for the Y head position. -#C : Inputs a correction value for the C head position. <Parameter (Value input)> - +00: -32 to +31 (Unit: 1 dot) - A: A to H (Unit: 1/8 dot) [Common to all menus] (5) Media selection for reciplocating print position setting Selects a target medium for reciplocating print position correction.
# SELECT I-POS > BASE
<Parameter (choice entry) > Sets a correction value for back feed of the basic medium. BASE : Selects a basical media. When a basical correction value is input in (6) menu, the correction value is reflected to the preset media. (It does not affect the deleted media.)
Note:
Use this setting only for manufacturing process. PAPER Glossy Matte Banner BLT_B : : : : : Selects PAPER as basical media. Selects Glossy as basical media. Selects Matte as basical media. Selects Banner as basical media. Selects BLT_B as basical media.
3-20
Note:
(6)
Ink position correction value (I-POS. ADJ.) Adjusts the ink position (L) of each head for the selected media. Input a correction value according to the print results of the head adjustment pattern.
# I-POS L xxxxxx # BK >+00 & A XXXXXX: Media name selected in (5).
<Sub-menus> (Display order of color pallet) - # Bk : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Bk head. - # Lm : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lm head. - # Lc : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lc head. -#M : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the M head. -#Y : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Y head. -#C : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the C head. <Parameter (Value input)> - +00: -32 to +31 (Unit: 1 dot) - A: A to H (Unit: 1/8 dot) [Common to all menus] (7) Ink position correction value (I-POS. ADJ.)R Adjusts the ink position (R) of each head for the selected media. Input a correction value according to the print results of the head adjustment pattern.
# I-POS R xxxxxx # BK >+00 & A XXXXXX: Media name selected in (5).
<Sub-menus> (Display order of color pallet) - # Bk : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Bk head. - # Lm : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lm head. - # Lc : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Lc head. -#M : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the M head. -#Y : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the Y head. -#C : Inputs a correction value for the ink position of the C head. <Parameter (Value input)> - +00: -32 to +31 (Unit: 1 dot) - A: A to H (Unit: 1/8 dot)
[Common to all menus]

(8) Set the drive voltage of each head. (DRIVE VOLTAGE) Input the drive voltage of each head. (Note: Set both right and left value for each head.)
# DRIVE VOLTAGE # BK (L) >16.0 V
<Sub-menus> (Display order of color pallet) - # Bk (L) : Sets the drive voltage of the left Bk head. - # Bk (R) : Sets the drive voltage of the left Bk head. - # Lc (L) : Sets the drive voltage of the right Lc head. - # Lc (R) : Sets the drive voltage of the right Lc head. - # Lm (L) : Sets the drive voltage of the Lm head. - # Lm (R) : Sets the drive voltage of the Lm head.
3-21
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
- # C (L) - # C (R) - # M (L) - # M (R) - # Y (L) - # Y (R)
: : : : : :
Sets the drive voltage of the C head. Sets the drive voltage of the C head. Sets the drive voltage of the M head. Sets the drive voltage of the M head. Sets the drive voltage of the Y head. Sets the drive voltage of the Y head.
<Parameter (Value input)> xx.x V (12.0 to 20.0 V, in 0.1 V units) [Common to all menus] (9) Line width check pattern print Prints a pattern (4-dot grid) to check the line width in each color in the assembly process. Press the key to stop printing.
# LINE WIDTH CHECK PATTERN >
<Parameter (Execution)> None
3-22
3.4.3
H. MNTE Menu
Fills ink initially and clean heads.
MEC. ADJ
H. ADJ RESET
H.MNTE
When the (1)
key is pressed, the parameters can be set.
Initial ink filling (INK CHARGE) Fills ink initially.

# INK CHARGE > ALL
<Parameter (Choice input)> - ALL : Fills ink initially for all 6 colors. - LEFT : Fills ink initially for left side 3 colors (Bk, Lc, Lm). - RIGHT : Fills ink initially for right side 3 colors (C, M, Y). (2) Ink drain (INK EXTRACT) Drains ink.
# INK EXTRACT > ALL
<Parameter (Choice entry)> - ALL : Drains ink initially for all 6 colors. - LEFT : Drains ink initially for left side 3 colors (Lm, Lc, Bk). - RIGHT : Drains ink initially for right side 3 colors (Y, M, C). (3) Service cleaning (SERVICE) Performs the service cleaning.
# SERVICE > SERVICE CLEAN1
<Parameter (choice input & execution)> - SERVICE CLEAN : Cleans the printer head and the ink path with the maintenance liquid in the state that the ink is killed into the printer. Use this for long time storage in filled up state of the maintenance liquid. - HEAD WASH : Use this when you make the printer print ready state after long time storage. Clean the head with the cleaning liquid.
3-23
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
NOTE
The service cleaning uses while new six maintenance liquid cartridges (for six colors) for one sequence. The head wash uses whole new six cleaning liquid cartridges (for six colors) for one sequence. Also, exclusive dummy cartridges are required for ink extracting during service guidance. Opening or closing the rear cover or levers should be avoided while service clean or head wash is in progress, or the operation may have to be restarted from the beginning, resulting in the waste of maintenance or cleaning fluid. If service clean or head wash is to be restarted, new maintenance or cleaning fluid cartridges are required. Both the service cleaning and the head wash take approximately one our. The cartridge setting and removing guidance are displayed during service cleaning and head washing. Follow the guidance. Empty the waste ink bottle.
(4)
Automatic cleaning (AUTO CLEANING) Sets whether to perform automatic cleaning.

# AUTO CLEANING > OFF
<Parameter (Choice input)> [Initial value: ON] - OFF : Do not perform automatic cleaning. - ON : Performs automatic cleaning. (5) Ink fill mode (INK CHARGE MODE) Indicates whether ink filling is completed. The state can be changed.
# INK CHARGE MODE > NOT YET
<Parameter (Choice entry)> - FINISHED : Ink filling is completed. - NOT YET : Ink is not filled. (6) Cleaning (CLEANING) Cleans heads.
# CLEANING > NORMAL
<Parameter (Choice entry)> - NORMAL : Cleaning 1 (Ordinary cleaning) - SLIGHT : Cleaning 2 (Slight cleaning) - STRONG : Cleaning 3 (Powerful cleaning) (7) Cap open (CAP OPEN) Open the cap.
# CAP OPEN >
3-24
(8)
Cap close (CAP CLOSE) Closes the cap.

# CAP CLOSE >
3-25
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Service Menu guidance

1)
1 2
Service clean (SERVICE CLEAN)

Remarks Initial guidance The display changes to No. 3's by pressing ENTER key. Parameter selection The display changes to No. 3's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. 1's by pressing CANCEL key. Waste ink bottle check The display changes to No. 4's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. 1's by pressing CANCEL key. Start of the ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 6's by closing the left cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 5-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 5-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 7's by closing the right cover after removing the cartridge. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 8's by closing the right cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 7-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 7-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 7's by opening the right cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 7's by opening the right cover. Start of the ink extraction. The display changes to No. 9's by pressing the ENTER key. Under ink extraction. The display changes to No. 10's after completion of the sequence. Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the left cover. Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 12's by closing the left cover after mounting WH cleaner (cleaning fluid) The display changes to No. 11-1's when expected remains (500 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 11-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 11-3's when other cartridge than WH cleaner is mounted. Mount a new CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the left cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the left cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the left cover.
Display #SERVICE >SERVICE CLEAN #SERVICE >SERVICE CLEAN #SERVICE *CHECK WASTE OK? OPEN L INKCOVER REMOVE CARTRIDGE SET DUMMY CART CLOSE L INKCOVER
3 4 5
5-1 5-2 6 7
OPEN L INK COVER SET XX SLOT SET DUMMY CART SET XX SLOT OPEN R INKCOVER REMOVE CARTRIDGE SET DUMMY CART CLOSE R INKCOVER
7-1 7-2 8 9 10
OPEN R INK COVER SET XX SLOT SET DUMMY CART SET XX SLOT EXTRACT START *CHECK WASTE OK? EXTRACTING xxx OPEN L INKCOVER SET CL FLUID
11
SET CL FLUID CLOSE L INKCOVER
11-1 11-2 11-3
SET NEW CL FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN L INKCOVER SET XX SLOT SET CL FLUID SET XX SLOT
3-26
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 3 Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions Display OPEN R INKCOVER SET CL FLUID Remarks Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 13's by opening the right cover. Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 14's by closing the right cover after mounting WH cleaner (cleaning fluid) The display changes to No. 13-1's when expected remains (500 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 13-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 13-3's when other cartridge than WH cleaner is mounted. Mount a new CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the right cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the right cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the right cover. Start of CL cleaner (maintenance fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 15's by pressing the ENTER key. Under charging CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 15's after completion of the sequence. Start of the ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 17's by opening the left cover. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 18's by closing the left cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 17-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 17-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 16's by opening the left cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 16's by opening the left cover. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 19's by closing the right cover after removing the cartridge. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 20's by closing the right cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changers to No. 19-1s when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 19-2s when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 18's by opening the right cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 18's by opening the right cover. Start of the ink extracting. The display changes to No. 21's by pressing the ENTER key. Under ink extracting. The display changes to No. 22's after completion of the sequence Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 23's by opening the left cover. Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 24's by closing the left cover after mounting WH cleaner (cleaning fluid). The display changes to No. 23-1's when expected remains (250 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 23-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 23-3's when other cartridge than WH cleaner is mounted.
12
13
SET CL FLUID CLOSE R INKCOVER
13-1 13-2 13-3 14 15 16
SET NEW CL FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN R INKCOVER SET XX SLOT SET CL FLUID SET XX SLOT CHARGE START *CHECK WASTE OK? CHARGING xxx OPEN L INKCOVER REMOVE CARTRIDGE SET DUMMY CART CLOSE L INKCOVER
17
17-1 17-2 18
OPEN L INK COVER SET XX SLOT SET DUMMY CART SET XX SLOT OPEN R INKCOVER REMOVE CARTRIDGE SET DUMMY CART CLOSE R INKCOVER
19
19-1 19-2 20 21 22
23
3-27
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
23-1 23-2 23-3 24
Display SET NEW CL FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN L INKCOVER SET XX SLOT SET CL FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN R INKCOVER SET MA FLUID
Remarks Mount a new CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 22's by opening the left cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 22's by opening the left cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 22's by opening the left cover. Start of WH cleaner (maintenance fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 25's by opening the right cover. Start of WH cleaner (maintenance fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 26's by closing the right cover after mounting WH cleaner (maintenance fluid). The display changes to No. 25-1's when expected remains (250 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 25-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 25-3's when other cartridge than WH cleaner is mounted Mount a new WH cleaner. The display changes to No. 25's by opening the right cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 25's by opening the right cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 25's by opening the right cover Start of WH cleaner (maintenance fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 27's by pressing the ENTER key. Under charging WH cleaner. The display changes to No. 28's after completion of the sequence. Under filling cap The display changes to No. 29's after completion of the sequence. End of the service cleaning. *NOTE 1) When the ENTER key is pressed at the error skip mode, the printer verifies waste ink amount. When the waste ink amount is other than 0 cc, the following guidance will be displayed. Discard the waste ink. The display changes to No. A2' when the waste ink bottle is removed. Mount an empty waste ink bottle. The display changes to No. A3' when the waste ink bottle is mounted. Counter reset guidance. The display returns to No. 4' by performing it after changing to "YES."
25
SET MA FLUID CLOSE R INKCOVER
25-1 25-2 25-3 26 27 28
SET NEW MA FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN R INKCOVER SET XX SLOT SET MA FLUID SET XX SLOT CHARGE START *CHECK WASTE OK? CHARGING xxx EXECUTING
29
#SERVICE >SERVICE CLEAN CHANGE WASTE BOTTLE SET EMPTY BOTTLE #WASTE CNT RESET *NO
A1 A2 A3
3-28
2)
1 2 3 4
Head wash (HEAD WASH)

Remarks Initial guidance The display changes to No. 2's by pressing the ENTER key. Parameter selection The display changes to No. 3's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. 1's by pressing CANCEL key. Waste ink bottle check The display changes to No. 4's by pressing ENTER key.* Note 1) Start of the ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 6's by closing the left cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 5-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 5-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 7's by closing the right cover after removing the cartridge. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 8's by closing the right cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 7-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 7-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 7's by opening the right cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 7's by opening the right cover. Start of the ink extraction. The display changes to No. 9's by pressing the ENTER key. Under ink extraction. The display changes to No. 10's after completion of the sequence. Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the left cover. Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 12's by closing the left cover after mounting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) The display changes to No. 11-1's when expected remains (500 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 11-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 11-3's when other cartridge than CL cleaner is mounted. Mount a new CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the left cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the left cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the left cover. Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 13's by opening the right cover.
Display #SERVICE >SERVICE CLEAN #SERVICE *HEAD WASH #SERVICE *CHECK WASTE OK? OPEN L INKCOVER REMOVE CARTRIDGE
SET DUMMY CART CLOSE L INKCOVER
5-1 5-2 6
OPEN L INK COVER SET XX SLOT SET DUMMY CART SET XX SLOT OPEN R INKCOVER REMOVE CARTRIDGE
SET DUMMY CART CLOSE R INKCOVER
7-1 7-2 8 9 10
11
11-1 11-2 11-3 12
SET NEW CL FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN L INKCOVER SET XX SLOT SET CL FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN R INKCOVER SET CL FLUID
3-29
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Display
13
13-1 13-2 13-3 14 15 16
SET NEW CL FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN R INKCOVER SET XX SLOT SET CL FLUID SET XX SLOT CHARGE START *CHECK WASTE OK? CHARGING xxx OPEN L INKCOVER REMOVE CARTRIDGE
17
17-1 17-2 18
19
19-1 19-2 20 21 22
23
Remarks Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 14's by closing the right cover after mounting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) . The display changes to No. 13-1's when expected remains (500 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 13-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 13-3's when other cartridge than CL cleaner is mounted. Mount a new CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the right cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the right cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 11's by opening the right cover. Start of CL cleaner (maintenance fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 15's by pressing the ENTER key. Under charging CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 15's after completion of the sequence. Start of the ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 17's by opening the left cover. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 18's by closing the left cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 17-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 17-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 16's by opening the left cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 16's by opening the left cover. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 19's by closing the right cover after removing the cartridge. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 20's by closing the right cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 19-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 19-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 18's by opening the right cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 18's by opening the right cover. Start of the ink extracting. The display changes to No. 21's by pressing the ENTER key. Under ink extracting. The display changes to No. 22's after completion of the sequence Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 23's by opening the left cover. Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 24's by closing the left cover after mounting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid). The display changes to No. 23-1's when expected remains (250 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 23-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 23-3's when other cartridge than CL cleaner is mounted.
3-30
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 3 Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions Display SET NEW CL FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN L INKCOVER SET XX SLOT SET CL FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN R INKCOVER SET CL FLUID Remarks Mount a new CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 22's by opening the left cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 22's by opening the left cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 22's by opening the left cover. Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance The display changes to No. 25 by opening the right cover. Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance The display changes to No. 26s by closing the right cover after setting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid), or to No. 25-2s if the remaining amount of fluid is less than the expected value (250 cc), or to 25-3s if mounting is wrong. Set new cleaning fluid. The display changes to No. 25s by opening the right cover. Set a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 25s by opening the right cover. Set a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 25s by opening the right cover. Start of CL cleaner (cleaning fluid) charge guidance. The display changes to No. 27's by pressing the ENTER key. Under charging WH cleaner. The display changes to No. 28's after completion of the sequence. Under head & sub-tank flushing. The display changes to No. 29's after completion of the sequence Start of the CL cleaner extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 30's by opening the left cover. CL cleaner extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 31's by closing the left cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 30-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 30-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 30's by opening the left cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 30's by opening the left cover. CL cleaner extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 32's by closing the right cover after removing the cartridge. CL cleaner extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 33's by closing the right cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 32-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 32-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 32's by opening the right cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 32's by opening the right cover. Start of the CL cleaner extracting. The display changes to No. 34's by pressing the ENTER key. Under ink extracting. The display changes to No. 35's after completion of the sequence. Start of the Sub-tank extraction guidance. The display changes to No.36's by opning the left cover.
23-1 23-2 23-3 24
25
CLOSE R INK COVER. SET NEW CL FLUID IN XX SLOT.
25-1 25-2 25-3 26 27 28 29
OPEN R INK COVER.

SET XX SLOT SET CL FLUID TO XX SLOT. CHARGE START *CHECK WASTE OK? CHARGING xxx FLUSHING xxx OPEN L INKCOVER REMOVE CARTRIDGE
30
30-1 30-2 31
32
32-1 32-2 33 34 35
3-31
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Display
36
SET CL FLUID OPEN L INKCOVER
36-1 36-2 36-3 37
SET USED FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN L INKCOVER SET XX SLOT SET CL FLUID SET XX SLOT OPEN R INKCOVER SET CL FLUID
38
38-1
38-2 38-3 39 40
SET USED FLUID SET XX SLOT

OPEN R INKCOVER SET XX SLOT SET CL FLUID SET XX SLOT SUBTANK EXTRACT *CHECK WASTE OK? EXTRACTING xxx
Remarks Sub-tank extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 37's by closing the left cover after mounting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid). The display changes to No. 36-1's when expected remains (250 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 36-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 36-3's when other cartridge than CL cleaner is mounted. Mount a new CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 36's by opening the left cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 36's by opening the left cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 36's by opening the left cover. Sub-tank extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 38's by opening the right cover. Sub-tank extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 38's by closing the right cover after mounting CL cleaner (cleaning fluid). The display changes to No. 38-1's when expected remains (250 cc) are not existed. The display changes to No. 38-2's when mounting is wrong. The display changes to No. 38-3's when other cartridge than CL cleaner is mounted. Mount a new CL cleaner. The display changes to No. 38's by opening the left cover.
Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 38's by opening the left cover. Mount a correct cartridge. The display changes to No. 38's by opening the left cover. Start of the Sub-tank extraction guidance. The display changes to No.40's by pressing the ENTER key. Under sub-tank extracting. The display changes to No. 41's after completion of the sequence.
41
#SERVICE >SERVICE CLEAN

CHANGE WASTE BOTTLE SET EMPTY BOTTLE #WASTE CNT RESET *NO
End of the head wash. *Note 1: When the ENTER key is pressed in the error skip mode, the printer checks the amount of waste ink, and if it is not 0 cc, displays the following guidance.
Discard the waste ink. The display changes to No. A2' when the waste ink bottle is removed. Mount an empty waste ink bottle. The display changes to No. A3' when the waste ink bottle is mounted. Counter reset guidance. The display returns to No. 4' by performing it after changing to "YES."
A1 A2 A3
3-32
3)
1 2
Ink charge (User Mode)

Remarks Initial guidance The display changes to No. 2's by pressing the ENTER key. Parameter selection The display changes to No. 3's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. l's by pressing CANCEL key. Waste ink bottle check The display changes to No. 4's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. l's by pressing CANCEL key. Start of the ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover. The display changes to No.4-1's when the expected remains (250 cc) are not exist. The display changes to No. 4-1's when wrong cartridge (dummy cartridge) is mounted. the display changes to the normal ink replacement guide when the cartridge. Mount a new ink cartridge. The display changes to the normal ink replacement guidance by opening the cover. Under ink changing. The display changes to No.6's completion of the requence. End of the ink change. *Note 1: When the ENTER key is pressed in the error skip mode, the printer checks the amount of waste ink, and if it is over 4,000 cc, displays the following guidance: Discard the waste ink. The display changes to No. A2' when the waste ink bottle is removed. Mount an empty waste ink bottle. The display changes to No. A3' when the waste ink bottle is mounted. Counter reset guidance. The display returns to No. 4' by performing it after changing to "YES."
Display #SERVICE >SER VICE CLEAN #SERVICE *INK CHARGE #SERVICE *CHECK WASTE OK?
CHARGE START *CHECK WASTE OK?
4-1 5
SET NEW INK SET XX SLOT CHARGING xxx #SERVICE >SERVICE CLEAN CHANGE WASTE BOTTLE SET EMPTY BOTTLE #WASTE CNT RESET *NO
A1 A2 A3
3-33
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4)
1 2
Ink charge (Maintenance mode)

Remarks Initial guidance The display changes to No. 2's by pressing the ENTER key. Parameter selection The display changes to No. 3's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. 1's by pressing CANCEL key. Waste ink bottle check The display changes to No. 4's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. 1's by pressing CANCEL key. The display changes to No.3-1's when the expected remains (250 cc) are not exist. The display changes to No. 3-1's when wrong cartridge (dummy cartridge) is mounted. The display changes to the normal ink replacement guide when the cartridge. Mount a new ink cartridge. The display changes to the normal ink replacement guidance by opening the cover. Start of the ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 5's by pressing ENTER key. Under ink changing. The display changes to No.6's completion of the requence. End of the ink change. *Note 1: When the ENTER key is pressed in the error skip mode, the printer checks the amount of waste ink, and if it is over 4,000 cc, displays the following guidance: Discard the waste ink. The display changes to No. A2' when the waste ink bottle is removed. Mount an empty waste ink bottle. The display changes to No. A3' when the waste ink bottle is mounted. Counter reset guidance. The display returns to No. 4' by performing it after changing to "YES."
Display #INK CHARGE >ALL #INK CHARGE *ALL
#INK CHARGE *CHECK WASTE OK?
3-1 4 5
SET NEW INK SET XX SLOT CHARGE START *CHECK WASTE OK? CHARGING xxx #INK CHARGE >ALL CHANGE WASTE BOTTLE SET EMPTY BOTTLE #WASTE CNT RESET *NO
A1 A2 A3
3-34
5)
1 2
Ink extracting (Maintenance mode)

Remarks Initial guidance The display changes to No. 2's by pressing the ENTER key. Parameter selection The display changes to No. 3's by pressing ENTER key. The display returns to No. 1's by pressing CANCEL key. Waste ink bottle check The display changes to No. 4's by pressing ENTER key. 1 The display returns to No. 1's by pressing CANCEL key. Start of the ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 6's by closing the left cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 5-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 5-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 5's by opening the left cover. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 7's by closing the right cover after removing the cartridge. Ink extraction guidance. The display changes to No. 8's by closing the right cover after mounting the dummy cartridge. The display changes to No. 7-1's when the dummy cartridge is not mounted. The display returns to No. 7-2's when other cartridge than the dummy cartridge is mounted. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 7's by opening the right cover. Check the slot. The display changes to No. 7's by opening the right cover. Start of the ink extraction. The display changes to No. 9's by pressing the ENTER key. Under ink extraction. The display changes to No. 10's after completion of the sequence. Power off guidance display. *Note 1: When the ENTER key is pressed in the error skip mode, the printer checks the amount of waste ink, and if it is over 4,000 cc, displays the following guidance: Discard the waste ink. The display changes to No. A2' when the waste ink bottle is removed. Mount an empty waste ink bottle. The display changes to No. A3' when the waste ink bottle is mounted. Counter reset guidance. The display returns to No. 4' by performing it after changing to "YES."
Display #INK EXTRACT >ALL #INK EXTRACT *ALL #INK EXTRACT *CHECK WASTE OK? OPEN L INKCOVER REMOVE CARTRIDGE
3 4
5-1 5-2 6
7-1 7-2 8 9
OPEN R INK COVER SET XX SLOT SET DUMMY CART SET XX SLOT EXTRACT START *CHECK WASTE OK? EXTRACTING xxx INK EXTRACT END POWER OFF CHANGE WASTE BOTTLE SET EMPTY BOTTLE #WASTE CNT RESET *NO
10
A1 A2 A3
3-35
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.4
RESET Menu
Resets the printer. When the key is pressed, the reset function is executed.
An initialization message is displayed on the LCD.
MEC. ADJ
H. ADJ.
H. M NTE RESET
INITIALIZING WAIT A MOMENT
3-36
3.4.5
TEST-PRN. Menu
Prints test patterns.
TEST-PRN
FEED TEST
SYSTEM
Press the (1)
key to set parameters.
Pattern 0 (PATTERN 0) Prints a test pattern 0 (vertical lines).

# PATTERN0 # EXECUTE * OK?
<Sub-menus> - # EXECUTE - # DIRECTION - # Bk, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm - # MODE - # LENGTH - # COUNT
: : : : : :
Prints a test pattern. Selects either one-way or two-way printing. Sets whether to print each of the colors. Selects a print mode. Specifys a line length. Specifys a number of prints.
<Parameter> - EXECUTE (Execution) : None - DIR (Choice input) [Initial value: BI] - UNI : Uni-directional printing - BI : Bi-directional printing - Bk, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm (Choice entry) [Initial value: Bk: ON, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm OFF]
- ON - OFF
: :
Prints the specified color. Do not print the specified color.
- MODE (Choice input) [Initial value: 070410] - 070410: 720 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, None-option - 070810: 720 dpi, 8-pass, speed-1, None-option - 070811: 720 dpi, 8-pass, speed-1, None-option (high density) - 030410: 360 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, None-option - 030210: 360 dpi, 2-pass, speed-1, None-option - LENGTH (Value input) [Initial value: 400 mm (A3)] 1 to 99999 mm (Print length (mm) specification, Decimal 5-digit input) - COUNT (Value input) [Initial value: 1] 1 to 99 (Print number specification)
3-37
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(2)
Pattern 1 (TEST PATTERN 1) Prints a test pattern 1 (horizontal lines). <Sub-menus and parameters> Same as pattern 0.
(3)
Pattern 2 (TEST PATTERN 2) Prints a test pattern 2 (checker). <Sub-menus and parameters> Same as pattern 0.
(4)
Pattern 3 (TEST PATTERN 3) Prints a test pattern 3 (1-dot grid). <Sub-menus and parameters> Same as pattern 0.
(5)
Pattern 4 (TEST PATTERN 4) Prints a test pattern 4 (2-dot grid). <Sub-menus and parameters> Same as pattern 0.
(6)
Pattern 5 (TEST PATTERN 5) Prints a test pattern 4 (solid pattern). <Sub-menus and parameters> Same as pattern 0.
(7)
Pattern 6 (TEST PATTERN 6) Prints a test pattern 6 (1-dot checker). <Sub-menus and parameters> Same as pattern 0.
(8)
(9)
(10) Pattern 9 (TEST PATTERN 9) Print a test pattern 9 (gradationed pattern). <Sub-menus and parameters> - # EXECUTE (Execution): None parameter - # DIR (Choice input) [Initial value: BI] - BI : Bi-directional printing - UNI : Uni-directional printing
3-38
- # Bk, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm (Choice entry) [Initial value: Bk ON, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm OFF] - ON : Prints the specified color. - OFF : Do not print the specified color. Printing only in one color is possible. When two or more colors are turned ON, a setup becomes effective by the prirority of Lm (priority : high), Lc, Y, M, C, and Bk (priority : low). - # MODE (Choice input) [Initial value: 070410] - 070410: 720 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, None-option - 070810: 720 dpi, 8-pass, speed-1, None-option - 070811: 720 dpi, 8-pass, speed-1, None-option (high density) - 030410: 360 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, None-option - 030210: 360 dpi, 2-pass, speed-1, None-option - # LENGTH (Value input) Irrespective of an input value, the printer prints by 7600 lines. - # COUNT (Value input) [Initial value: 1] Irrespective of an input value, the printer prints by one sheet. (11) Pattern 10 (TEST PATTERN 10) Prints a test pattern 10 (dot grid and diagonal line). <Sub-menus and parameters> Same as pattern 0. (12) Pattern 11 (TEST PATTERN11) Prints a test pattern 11 (for paper feed accuracy measurement). <Sub-menus and parameter> - # EXECUTE (Execution) : None parameter - # DIR (Choice entry) [Initial value : TWO WAY] Print a test pattern in one way regardless of choice. - # Bk, C, M, Y, Lc, Lm (Choice entry) Print a test pattern in Bk color regardless of choice. - # MODE (Choice entry) 070410: 720 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, no option 070810: 720 dpi, 8-pass, speed-1, no option 070811: End without printing 030410: 720 dpi, 4-pass, speed-1, no option 030210: End without printing - # LENGTH (Value input) Print a test pattern in 100 mm top margin +359 mm pattern regardless of input value. - # COUNT (Value input) [Initial value : 1] 1 to 99 (Number of copies specification) (13) Pattern 12 (4 DOT GRID) Prints a test pattern 12 (4-dot grid). <Sub-menus and parameters> Same as pattern 0.
3-39
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.6
SYSTEM Menu
Sets or displays system parameters.
TEST-PRN
FEED
SYSTEM
Press the (1)
key to set system parameters.
LCD language display (LANGUAGE)

# LANGUAGE > ENGLISH
Sets LCD message display language (Japanese or English). <Parameter (Choice entry)> - JAPANESE : Japanese - ENGLISH : English (2) Date setting (SYSTEM DATE) Sets date (year/month/day).
# SYSTEM DATE > 00/01/01
<Parameter (Value input)> xx/yy/zz xx: year (lower two digits), yy: month, zz: day (3) Time setting (SYSTEM TIME) Sets time (hour/min/second).
# SYSTEM TIME > 00:00
<Parameter (Value input)> xx: yy xx: hour (4)
yy: minite
Machine serial number setting (SERIAL NO.) Sets a machine serial number.
# SERIAL No. > 00000000
<Parameter (Value input)> xxxxxxxx: 8 digits (0 to 9, A to Z: alphabets and figures) (5) NVRAM initialization (NVRAM INIT)
# NVRAN INIT >
Initializes the NVRAM. <Parameter (Execution)> None
3-40
(6)
Factory setting value save (SAVE SETTING) Saves NVRAM contents in the factory setting area in the flash memory.
# SAVE SETTING >
<Parameter (Execution)> None (7) Factory setting value restore (RESTORE SETTING) Restores the contents in the factory setting area in the flash memory to the NVRAM.
# RESTORE SETTING >
<Parameter (Execution)> None (8) NVRAM save (SAVE NVRAM)

# SAVE NVRAM >
Saves NVRAM contents in the NVRAM backup area in the flash memory. <Parameter (Execution)> None (9) NVRAM restore (RESTORE NVRAM) Restores the contents of the backup area in the flash memory to the NVRAM.
# RESTORE NVRAM >
<Parameter (Execution)> None (10) BOOT Version display (BOOT VERSION) Displays the BOOT ROM Version.
# BOOT VERSION * X. XX X: Version number
<Parameter (Execution)> None (11) Engine F/W version display (F/W VERSION) Displays the Engine F/W version.
# F/W VERSION * X. XX YY X: System version Y: Control code
3-41
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(12) IPB board version display (IPB VERSION) Displays the IPB board version.
# IPB VERSION * X. X X: Version number
<Parameter (Execution)> None (13) SCSI board version display (WIM VERSION) Displays the WIM board version.
# WIM VERSION * X. X X: Version number
<Parameter (Execution)> None (14) ICB board version display (ICB VERSION) Displays the ICB board version.
# ICB VERSION * X. XX X: Version number
<Parameter (Execution)> None (15) ASIC version display (ASIC VERSION) Displays the ASIC version.
# ASIC VERSION * X. XX X: Version number
(16) Heater hardware version display (HEAT HW VERSION)

Displays the heater hardware version.
# HEAT HW VERSION * XX. X X: Version number
<Parameter (Execution)> None Note: When the heater cannot be recognized, " _ _ . _ " will be displayed.
3-42
(17) Heater firmware version display (HEAT FW VERSION) Displays the heater hardware version.
# HEAT FW VERSION * XX. X
X: Version number
<Parameter (Execution)> None Note: When the heater cannot be recognized, " _ _ . _ " will be displayed.
(18) Heater FW update

Updates the version of the heater F/W.
# HEATER F/W UPDATE >
<Parameter (Execution)> None An IC card containing the latest heater F/W image is used for updating the heater F/W. The guidance in the next page explains the procedure of update.
3-43
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
<Update procedure>
# HEATER F/W UPDATE >
# HEATER F/W UPDATE >OK?
INSERT IC CARD
After inserting the IC card:
UPDATING WAIT FOR A WHILE.
*: Flashes while update is in progress. Note: The procedure may not be completed if power failure occurs during update operation.
(For normal end)

UPDATE COMPLETED. TURN OFF AND ON POWER.
3-44
(Recognition error)
RECOGNITION ERROR TURN POWER OFF AND ON.
The printer will restore by turning the power off and then on (note 1).
The printer does not recognize the heater control panel.
(IC card error)

IC CARD ERROR TURN POWER OFF AND ON.
The IC card is not mounted properly. F/W image is not written in the IC card.
(Data transmission error)

COMMUNICATION ERROR TURN POWER OFF AND ON.
Data transfer between the IPB and heater control panel is not successful. Checksum for transferred data does not match.
(Write error)
WRITE ERROR TURN POWER OFF AND ON.
This update procedure cannot be used because the heater F/W data has been deleted (note 2).
FW cannot be written successfully.
Note 1:
When the printer does not terminate normally after restart is attempted several times, failure of the heater control panel can be considered. In this case, the heater control panel needs to be replaced. The heater control panel needs to be replaced.
Note 2:
3-45
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.7
FEED Menu
Feeds paper manually.
TEST-PRN
FEED
SYSTEM
While the
key is held down, paper is fed.
A feeding message appears on the LCD. When the key is released, the paper stops and the top menu reappears.
3-46
3.4.8
MONITOR Menu
Displays the states of sensors and thermistors in real time.
MONITOR
SETUP ACTUATOR
DIAG
When the (1)
key is pressed, the monitor menu can be selected.
Engine sensor (ENGINE SENSOR) Displays the states of sensors in real time. If the state of a sensor changes, a buzzer sounds.
# ENGINE SENSOR # EDGE * 0
<Sub-menus> - # EDGE - # FEED - # EXIT - # HOME POSITION
- # WIPE - # LEVER - # INTERLOCK-L - # INTERLOCK-R - # MEDIA END
: Displays the state of the edge sensor. (0 : No paper, 1 : paper exists) : Displays the state of the paper sensor. (0 : No paper, 1 : paper exists) : Displays the state of the paper delivery sensor. (0 : No paper, 1 : paper exists) : Displays the state of the home position sensor. (0 : Home position is not detected, 1 : Home position is detected) : Displays the state of the wipe sensor. : Displays the state of the lever sensor. (0 : close, 1 : open) : Displays the state of the interlock L. (0 : close, 1 : open) : Displays the state of the interlock R. (0 : close, 1 : open) : Displays the state of the media end ensor.
<Parameter (Execution)> None [Common to all menus] (2) Ink sensor (INK SENSOR) Displays the states of ink sensors in real time. When the state of a sensor changes, a buzzer sounds.
# INK SENSOR # INK1 ON
<Sub-menus> - # INK 1 ON - # INK 2 ON - # INK 3 ON - # INK 4 ON - # INK 5 ON - # INK 6 ON - # INK COVER L - # INK COVER R
: Displays the state of ink (Bk) installation sensor 1. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) : Displays the state of ink (Lc) installation sensor 2. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) : Displays the state of ink (Lm) installation sensor 3. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) : Displays the state of ink (C) installation sensor 4. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) : Displays the state of ink (M) installation sensor 5. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) : Displays the state of ink (Y) installation sensor 6. (0 : not mounted, 1 : mounted) : Displays the state of left ink cover sensor. (0 : close, 1 : open) : Displays the state of right ink cover sensor.
3-47
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(0 : close, 1 : open) <Parameter (Execution)> None [Common to all menus]

(Remark) Alignment of sensors 1 to 6 is the same as the head alignment in 1: Bk, 2: Lm, .....6: C.
(3)
Sub tank sensor (SUB TANK SENSOR) Displays the states of sub tank sensors in real time. When the state of a sensor changes, a buzzer sounds.
# SUB TANK SENSOR # FULL1 * 0
<Sub-menus> - # FULL 1 - # FULL 2 - # FULL 3 - # FULL 4 - # FULL 5 - # FULL 6 - # HALF 1 - # HALF 2 - # HALF 3 - # HALF 4 - # HALF 5 - # HALF 6 - # INK SUPPLY 1 - # INK SUPPLY 2 - # INK SUPPLY 3 - # INK SUPPLY 4 - # INK SUPPLY 5 - # INK SUPPLY 6 <Parameter (Execution)> None [Common to all]
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 1. Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 2. Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 3. Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 4. Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 5. Displays the state of sub tank full sensor 6. Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 1. Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 2. Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 3. Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 4. Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 5. Displays the state of sub tank half sensor 6. Displays the state of ink supply sensor 1. Displays the state of ink supply sensor 2. Displays the state of ink supply sensor 3. Displays the state of ink supply sensor 4. Displays the state of ink supply sensor 5. Displays the state of ink supply sensor 6.
(Remark) Alignment of sensors 1 to 6 is the same as the head alignment in 1: Bk, 2: Lm, .....6: C.
(4) Waste ink bottle (WASTE BOTTLE) Displays the states of waste ink bottle sensors in real time. When the state of a sensor changes, a buzzer sounds.
# WASTE BOTTLE # INSTALL * 0
<Sub-menus> - # INSTALL
: Displays the state of the waste ink bottle installation sensor. (0 : mounted, 1 : Not mounted)
<Parameter (Execution)> None [Common to all menus]
3-48
(5)
Winder (WINDER/UNIT) Displays the states of winder sensors in real time. When the state of a sensor changes, a buzzer sounds.
# WINDER UNIT # SLACK *
<Sub-menus> - # SLACK - # SWITCH1 - # SWITCH2
: Displays the state of the slack sensor (0: slack exists, 1: No slack) : Displays the state of switch1. : Displays the state of switch2.
<Parameter (Execution)> None [Common to all menus]

NOTE: SWITCH 1 AND SWITCH 2 state show the winder setting switch state set to external winding, internal winding, or stop. (Not two sensors)
(6)
Thermistors (THERMISTOR) Display the states of thermistors in real time.

# THERMISTOR # ENV *
<Sub-menus> - # ENV. : Environmental temperature - # HEAD1 : Displays the state of the head 1 (Bk) temperature. - # HEAD2 : Displays the state of the head 2 (Lm) temperature. - # HEAD3 : Displays the state of the head 3 (Lc) temperature. - # HEAD4 : Displays the state of the head 4 (Y) temperature. - # HEAD5 : Displays the state of the head 5 (M) temperature. - # HEAD6 : Displays the state of the head 6 (C) temperaature. - # CRG1 : Displays the state of the carridge board position1 temperature. - # CRG2 : Displays the state of the carridge board position2 temperature. - # CRG3 : Displays the state of the carridge board position3 temperature. - # CRG4 : Displays the state of the carridge board position4 temperature. - # CRG5 : Displays the state of the carridge board position5 temperature. - # CRG6 : Displays the state of the carridge board position6 temperature. - # CRG7 : Displays the state of the carridge board position7 temperature. * The number of temperatures to measure on the carriage board may be changed. <Parameter (Execution)>
None [Common to all menus]

NOTE: Alignment of HEAD1 to 6 is the same as the head alignment in 1: Bk, 2: Lm, .....6: C. CRG1 to 7 are mounted on the ICB board and located as follows: CRG 1: TH 2, CRG 2: TH 6, CRG 3: TH 3, CRG 4: TH 7, CRG 5: TH 4, CRG 6: TH 8, CRG 7: TH 5
3-49
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.9
DIAG Menu
Makes a diagnosis of the engine and SCSI boards.
MONITOR
DIAG
SETUP ACTUATOR
When the
key is pressed, the Diagnosis Menu can be selected.
After making a diagnosis on the Diagnosis Menu, execute the reset function. (1) Flash ROM (FLASH ROM) Makes a diagnosis of the flash ROM and display its results.
# FLASH ROM >
<Parameter (Execution)> None (2) PIO (PIO) Makes a diagnosis of the flash ROM and display its results.
# PIO >
<Parameter (Execution)> None (3) NVRAM (NVRAM) Makes a diagnosis of the NVRAM and display its results.
# NVRAM >
<Parameter (Execution)> None (4) Carriage I/F (CARRIAGE I/F) Makes a diagnosis of the carriage interface and display its results.
# CARRIAGE I/F >
<Parameter (Execution)> None (5) Ink EEPROM (INK EEPROM) Makes a diagnosis of the ink EEPROM and display its results.
# INK EEPROM >
3-50
(6)
SCSI data (SCSI DATA) Makes a diagnosis of the SCSI board and display its results.
# SCSI DATA >
(7)
ATGATG Makes a diagnosis of the ATG and display its results.

# ATG >
<Parameter (Execution)> None (8) DRAM (DRAM) Makes a diagnosis of the band memory and display its results.
# DRAM >
<Parameter (Execution)> None (9) RSM (RSM) Makes a diagnosis of the RSM and display its results.
# RSM >
<Parameter (Execution)> None (10) PTC (PTC) Makes a diagnosis of the PTC and display its results. <Parameter (Execution)> None (11) PDD (PDD) Makes a diagnosis of the PDD and display its results. <Parameter (Execution)> None (12) All (ALL) Makes the above diagnosis 1 to 11 continuously and display their results. <Parameter (Execution)> None
3-51
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(13) VDD (VDD) Sets 24 V, 17 V, or 6 V for VDD. Measure voltage by a tester. <Sub-menu> - 24 V - 17V - 6V : : : Sets 24 V. Sets 17V. Sets 6V.
<Parameter (Execution)> None Measuring points and expected values (ICB1 board)
Operation panel specific voltage 24V 24 12 24 12 24 12 24 12 24 12 24 12 24 12 24 12 24 12 24 12 24 12 24 12 7V 17 8.5 17 8.5 17 8.5 17 8.5 17 8.5 17 8.5 17 8.5 17 8.5 17 8.5 17 8.5 17 8.5 17 8.5 6V 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 Usage Expected voltage [v] TP22 TP25 TP28 TP30 TP32 TP24 TP36 TP38 TP40 TP42 TP44 TP46 TP48 TP50 TP52 TP54 TP56 TP58 TP60 TP62 TP64 TP66 TP68 TP70 K-Left-On voltage K-Left-Off voltage K-Right-On voltage K-Right-Off voltage Lm-Left-On voltage Lm-Left-Off voltage Lm-Righ-On voltage Lm-Righ-Off voltage Lc-Left-On voltage Lc-Left-Off voltage Lc-Right-On voltage Lc-Right-Off voltage V-Left-On voltage V-Left-Off voltage V-Right-On voltage V-Right-Off voltage M-Left-On voltage M-Left-Off voltage M-Right-On voltage M-Right-Off voltage C-Left-On voltage C-Left-Off voltage C-Right-On voltage C-Right-Off voltage
Measuring point
3-52
(14) Operation panel (PANEL) Operates the LCD, LEDs, buzzer, and keys on the operation panel. The results are judged
audibly.
# PANEL > KEY
<Parameter (Choice entry & Execution)> None KEY : Displays the key entry on the LCD. DISPLAY : Turns on and off LEDs in sequence, displays specific character strings, and sounds buzzers.
3-53
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.10 SETUP Menu

Sets on/off of the power same mode.
MONITOR
DIAG
SETUP ACTUATOR
Press the (1)
key to set parameters.
Power save (POWER SAVE) Sets whether to save power.

# POWER SAVE > ON
<Parameters (choice input)>
- ON - OFF
(2)
: Saves power. : Do not save power.
SCSI driver (SCSI DRIVER) Sets whether the SCSI driver works for IP-4500 or IP-6600.
# SCSI DRIVER > NORMAL
<Parameters (choice input)> - NORMAL : Works for IP-6600 driver. - COMPATIBLE : Works for IP-4500 driver.
3-54
3.4.11 ACTUATOR Menu

Operates each actuator individually.
MONITOR
DIAG
SETUP ACTUATOR
When the (1)
key is pressed, parameters can be set.
Carriage movement (MOVE CARRIAGE) Move the carriage. (The acceleration and speed are fixed.)
# MOVE CARRIAGE > HOME
<Parameters (Choice entry)> - HOME : Detects home position and move the carriage to the home position. - CAP : Moves the carriage to the capping position. (Capping is not performed.) - CENTER : Moves the carriage to the center. - WIPE : Moves the carriage to the wiping position. (2) Paper feed motor (PF MOTOR) Drives the paper feed motor. (The acceleration and speed are fixed.)
# PF MOTOR > OFF
<Parameters (Choice input)> - OFF : Stops the motor. - FORWARD : Runs the motor in the paper feeding direction. - REWIND : Runs the motor in the rewinding direction. (3) Pump motor (PUMP MOTOR) Controls the pump motor.
# PUMP MOTOR > STOP
<Parameters (Choice entry)> - STOP : Stops the motor. - NORMAL : Runs the motor in the normal direction. - REVERSE : Runs the motor in the reverse direction. (4) Wipe motor (WIPE MOTOR) Controls the wipe motor.
# WIPE MOTOR > STOP
<Parameters (Choice entry)> - STOP : Stops the motor. - NORMAL : Runs the motor in the normal direction. - REVERSE : Runs the motor in the reverse direction.
3-55
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(5)
Pump solenoid 1 (PUMP SOLENOID 1) Controls pump solenoid 1.

# PUMP SOLENOID1 > OFF
(Wipe side)
<Parameters (Choice entry)> - OFF : Turns fan motor 1 OFF. - ON : Turns fan motor 1 ON. (6) Pump solenoid 2 (PUMP SOLENOID 2) Controls pump solenoid 2.
# PUMP SOLENOID2 > OFF
(Cap side)
<Parameters (Choice entry)> - OFF : Turns fan motor 1 OFF. - ON : Turns fan motor 1 ON. (7) Fan motor 1 (FAN MOTOR1) Controls fan motor 1.
# FAN MOTOR1 > OFF
(Wipe side)
<Parameters (Choice entry)>

- OFF - ON : Turns fan motor 1 OFF. : Turns fan motor 1 ON.
(8)
Fan motor 2 (FAN MOTOR2) Control fan motor 2.

# FAN MOTOR2 > OFF
(Senter)

(9)
Fan motor 3 (FAN MOTOR3) Control fan motor 3.

# FAN MOTOR3 > OFF
(Cap side)

3-56
(10) Unit Cooling FAN (COOL FAN) Control the unit cooling fan.
# COOL FAN > OFF

- OFF - ON : Turns the unit cooling fan OFF. : Turns the unit cooling fan ON.
(11) Head Cooling FAN (HEAD COOL FAN) Control the head cooling fan.
# HEAD COOL FAN > OFF

- OFF - ON : Turns the head cooling fan OFF. : Turns the head cooling fan ON.
(12) Winding motor (WIND MOTOR) Drive the winding motor.

# WIND MOTOR > OFF
<Parameters (Choice entry)> *Note: The parameters may be changed to normal and reverse rotation. - OFF : Stops the motor. - ON : Drives the motor. (13) Ink supply motor 1 (ISM 1) Drives ink supply motor 1.
# ISM1 > STOP
(Bk)
<Parameters (Choice entry)> - STOP : Stops the motor in normal directuion. - NORMAL : Drives the motor. - REVERSE : Drives the motor in reverse direction. (14) Ink supply motor 2 (ISM 2) Drives ink supply motor 2.
# ISM2 > STOP
(Lm)
<Parameters (Choice entry)> - STOP : Stops the motor in normal directuion. - NORMAL : Drives the motor. - REVERSE : Drives the motor in reverse direction.
3-57
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(15) Ink supply motor 3 (ISM 3) Drives ink supply motor 3.

# ISM3 > STOP
(Lc)
# ISM4 > STOP
(Y)
# ISM5 > STOP
(M)
(18) Ink supply motor 6 (ISM 6) Drives ink supply motor 6.

# ISM6 > STOP
(C)
3-58
3.4.12 FUNCTION Menu

Executes the functions provided for the printer.
FUNC
COUNTER
When the (1)
key is pressed, the parameters can be set.
System information print (SYSTEM PRINT) Prints information about the system, setting, mechanical parameters, and ink.
# SYSTEM PRINT >
<Parameter (Execution)> None For more information on system information print, see Section 3.4.12.1. (2) Error log print (ERROR LOG PRINT) Print error log information stored in the printer.
# ERROR LOG PRINT >
<Parameter (Execution)> None For more information on error log information printing, see Section 3.4.12.2. (3) History print (HISTORY PRINT) Prints ink system cleaning condition stored to the printer.
# HISTORY PRINT >
<Parameter (Execution)> None For more information on history print, see Section 3.4.12.3.
3-59
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.12.1
System information print
The system information print prints system information such a version, cartridge information such ink remaining amount,media information, media feed adjustment values, mechanical parameters, registered media information,and etc. <Print format>
3.4.12.2
Error log print
An engine error log is created when Fatal/Correctable1/Correctable2 error or warning occurs or is released and when the printer is shut down. A total of 9000 bytes of error log information is generated (300 logs , 30 bytes per log). Error logs can be printed by selecting the ERROR LOG menu of the FUNCTION menu. <Print format>
3-60
<Print contents> 1. No: Error log number 300 logs are printed from the latest one. 2. Date: Error logged date Print an error logged date. 3. Time: Error logged time Print an error logged time in 24 hour system. (hour: minute) 4. Err: Error type (Print in symbols) 1 --- Correctable 1 error 2 --- Correctable 2 error F --- Fatal error 5. Fatal: Fatal error type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates a fatal error type.
Bit pos 21-23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Long term storage Cooling fan Cap position gap Reserve FFC connection Sub-tank supply Ink supply sensor Sub-tank sensor Edge sensor sensitivit NVRAM VDD2 Servo Capping Temperature sensor IC temperature Head temperature Wiper Home position detection Flash Reserve Fan GA_DMA Diagnostic Flag name Fired to "0" 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error Not defined. 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error Fired to "0" 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Normal 1: Error Description
3-61
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6. Cor1: Correctable 1 error type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates a correctable 1 error type.
Bit pos 15-9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Media jam 1 SCSI communication error Media size Skew Out of media Media jam 2 Lever Interlock Flag name 0: Fixed 0: Normal 1: Media jam (servo detection) 0: Normal 1: Communication error 1 0: Normal 1: Media size error 0: Normal 1: Skew error 0: Fixed 0: Normal 1: Out of media 0: Normal 1: Paper jam 0=Close, 1=Open 0=Close, 1=Open Description
7. Cor2: Correctable 2 error type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates a correctable 2 error type.
Bit pos 15-9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Waste bottle installation Environmental temperature Head temperature Cartridge installation Cartridge ID Ink remaining amount Ink cover 2 Ink cover 1 Flag name 0: Fixed 0: Normal 1: Not installed 0: Fixed 0: Normal 1: Error 0: In operating range 1: Outside operating range 0: Normal 1: Cartridge not installed 0: Normal 1: Cartridge ID error 0: Ink 1: No ink 0=Close, 1=Open 0=Close, 1=Open Description
8. Warn: Warning type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates a warning type.

Bit pos 15-3 2 1 0 Winding unit Near Empty Flag name 0: Fixed 0: Normal 1: Error 0: Fixed 0: Ink 1: Ink running out Description
3-62
9. Status: Engine status type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates an engine status type.
Bit pos 31 30-26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Power off Reserve Ink error Existence of the cartridge Reserve Under pre-heating Under firmware updating Under ink supplying Cartridge end Ink cover R Ink cover L Winding nit Data reception Outlet sensor Media supply sensor Ink Fill ShutDown Dry Panel Recover Paper Loading Clean Print Power Save Pause Busy Error Warning Flag name 1: Shut down 0: Fixed 0=No error, 1=Error 0=Existence, 1=No cartridg 0: Fixed 1=Under pre-heating 1=Under updating 1=Under ink supplying 1=Enpty ink in the cartridge 0=Close, 1=Open 0=Close, 1=Open 0: Stop 1: Operating 1: Data is being received 0: Off 1: On 0: Off 1: On 1: Ink is being filled. 1: Shutdown is being requested. 1: Drying 0: The engine controls the panel. 1: The controller controls the panel. 1: Recovering 1: Paper loading 1: Cleaning 1: Printing 1: Power save mode 1: Pausing 1: Busy 0: No error 1: Error 0: No warning 1: Warning Description
3-63
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
10. Distance: Running distance (Print in decimal digits) Engine running distance (unit: mm) 11. Pa: Paper type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates a type of paper. 64h: Registered media 1 (PAPER) 65h: Registered media 2 (Glossy) 66h: Registered media 3 (Matte) 67h: Registered media 4 (Banner) 68h: Registered media 5 (BLT_B) 69h: Registered media 6 ... 77h: Registered media 20 12. C/R: Roll paper/cut sheet type (Print in hexadecimal digits) Indicates roll paper or cut sheet. 00h: Roll paper 01h: Cut sheet
3.4.12.3
Cleaning history print
The cleaning history print prints daily maintenance history information that the customer performed. Up to 100 logs that in clude data and performance contents information can be obtained. The cleaning history print can be printed by performing HISTORY PRINT in FINC menu. <Print format>
Contents list UM_SERVICE UM_HEADWASH UM_INKCHARGE I UM_CAPCLEAN UM_WIPECLEAN UM_FILLCAP UM_ADJHEIGHT UM_NORMALCLN UM_SLIGHTCLN UM_STRONGCLN UM_INVALID
Service cleaning Head wash nk initial charge Cap cleaning Wiper cleaning Fill cap Head height adjustment Normal cleaning Slight cleaning Strong cleaning No history (unsettled)
3-64
3.4.13 COUNTER Menu

Display and set the paper movement length and paper use length counter (counter 1) saved in the engine.
FUNC
COUNTER
When the (1)
key key is pressed, parameters can be adjusted.
Paper use length (A3) (PAPER COUNT A3) Displays and sets the paper use length (A3 size) of counter 1.
# PAPER COUNTA3 > 000000m
<Parameter (Value input)> Decimal 7 digits (Unit: m) (2) Paper use length (A2) (PAPER COUNT A2) Displays and sets the paper use length (A2 size) of counter 1.
<Parameter (Value input)> Decimal 7 digits (Unit: m)
(3) Paper use length (A1) (PAPER COUNT A1)

Displays and sets the paper use length (A1 to A0 size) of counter 1.
<Parameter (Value input)> Decimal 7 digits (Unit: m) (4) Paper use length (A0) (PAPER COUNT A0) Displays and sets the paper use length (A0 size to 36" size) of counter 1.
<Parameter (Value input)> Decimal 7 digits (Unit: m) (5) Paper use length (36") (PAPER COUNT 36") Displays and sets the paper use length (larger than 36" size) of counter 1.
# PAPER COUNT36" > 000000m
<Parameter (Value input)> Decimal 7 digits (Unit: m)
3-65
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.5
System Information Management
The system information managed by the engine includes mechanical correction parameters, running distance counter, and ink cartridge data, which are stored in the NVRAM. The system information is stored in the SRAM or flash memory as required for operation or backup. - SRAM area : Stores current values of system information. - NVRAM area : Stores power-on default values of system information. - Flash memory area : Stores following information: NVRAM structure information and initial values
Factory-set NVRAM information NVRAM backup information

<SRAM> NVRAM current value Default value <NVRAM> <Flash memory> NVRAM backup information (8 KB)
NVRAM factory settings (8 KB)
Program and data
NVRAM structure information and initial
values
3-66
Pass NVRAM initialization (Flash -> NVRAM) <Processing> (1) Initializes the NVRAM with the program default values. The engine correction values are returned to the values before adjustment.
<Operation procedure or start timing> It can be performed from the operation panel (maintenance mode) using the following menu: (1) - SYSTEM menu: NVRAM INIT
Pass Save factory settings to flash memory. (NVRAM -> Flash) <Processing> (1) Write all NVRAM data into the factory setting area of the flash memory.
<Operation procedure or start timing> It can be performed from the operation panel (maintenance mode) using the following menu: (1) - SYSTEM menu: SAVE SETTING
Pass Return the NVRAM to factory settings. (Flash -> NVRAM) <Processing> (1) Write some NVRAM factory settings (Section NVRAM4*1) stored in the flash memory into the NVRAM. *1: Section NVRAM4: Mechanical, head adjustment values, paper feed correction value for each paper, drying time, etc. Do not write the counter value in NVRAM. <Operation procedure or start timing> It can be performed from the operation panel (maintenance mode) using the following menu: (1) - SYSTEM menu: RESTORE SETTING
Pass Save NVRAM in the flash memory for backup. (NVRAM -> Flash) <Processing> (1) Write all NVRAM default values into the NVRAM backup area of the flash memory.
<Operation procedure or start timing> (1) (2) It is performed when the power is shut down or when the printer is reset. It can be executed from the operation panel (maintenance mode) using the following menu: - SYSTEM menu: SAVE NVRAM
3-67
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Pass Restore the NVRAM with NVRAM backup information in the flash memory. (Flash -> NVRAM) <Processing> (1) Write all NVRAM backup information saved in the flash memory into the NVRAM.
<Operation procedure or start timing>
(1)
It can be executed from the operation panel (maintenance mode) using the following menu: - SAVE: RESTORE NVRAM
Pass SRAM -> NVRAM Pass NVRAM -> SRAM (1)
Passes 6 and 7 are used by the engine F/W if required.
3-68
3.6
3.6.1
Heater Panel Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions

Entering maintenance mode
Press the following six switches on the heater panel in this order. Front Platen --> Front --> Rear --> Rear --> Platen -->
3.6.2
(1)
Basic menu operation

Transfering between items Use the front and front keys.
(2)
Selecting an item Press the front ON/OFF key to enter the item after transfering to the item of which parameter is required to change.
(3)
Selecting a parameter Use the front and front key to select a parameter.
(4)
Determining a selected value Press the front ON/OFF key to set the selected value. The display returns to the setting display.
(5)
Exiting the mode Transfer to EXIT menu that exists in the lowest class menu.
3-69
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.6.3
Menu items
The setting items in the maintenance mode are listed below.
No
Item Front heater presetting Upper temperature limitation Rear heater presetting Upper temperature limitation Print heater presetting Upper temperature limitation Stand by temperature
Display item
Setting value 1560C 1560C
Meaning Front heater upper limitation temperature preset by users.
Initial value 55
F LIMIT
LIMIT
1560C 1560C 1560C 1560C 1540C 1540C OFF
Rear heater upper limitation temperature preset by users. Print heater upper limitation temperature preset by users. Preset temperature for stand by state Turns the heater test off Turns the heater test on Returns all parameters to factory settings Do nothing Exit from the maintenance mode Does not exit from the maintenance mode
55
P LIMIT
55
STANDBY TEMP
35
Heater test (NOTE 2)
HEATER TEST ON YES
Parameter initializing
RESET PARAM NO YES
End of setting
EXIT NO
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 2)
If the unit of the heater temperature is set to "F", all values are converted to "F". The heater test ignores the heater ON/OFF command from the serial interface, and turns the heater ON/OFF only by the ON/OFF switch operation on the operation panel.
3-70
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 4
Troubleshooting (General)
Before deciding that there is a serious problem with the printer check the following items.
Items to check
Symptom Power does not turn on The printer does not start or operate correctly Items to check Power cable connection Power supply to the outlet Isolation switch ON/OFF Power switch ON/OFF ERROR lamp and message on the LCD Interface cable connection ERROR lamp and message on the LCD ERROR lamp OFF The transmitted data is not processed immediately DATA lamp (flashing?) Corrective measures Plug the power cable into the outlet correctly. Supply the power to the outlet. Turn the isolation switch ON. Turn the power switch ON. Take appropriate measures according to the error message. See When an Error Message Appears on Section 5 in the User's Guide. Connect the interface cable correctly. Take appropriate measures according to the error message. See When an Error Message Appears on Section 5 in the User's Guide. Print nozzle adjustment pattern. See Mechanical Adjustment Menu on Section 3 in the User's Guide. Check the communication conditions to the computer.
Cannot print
Paper type Ink type Poor print quality Ink head cleaning
Paper type
Paper jams occur frequently
Paper setting Check whether there is any foreign material in the carriage path on the paper path. Environment temperature
Use Our-recommended paper. See Consumables on Appendix in the User's Guide. Use Our-recommended ink. See Consumables on Appendix in the User's Guide. Clean the ink head. See Head Cleaning on Section 2 in the User's Guide. Check whether the paper type setting matches the type of the loaded paper. See Installing Paper Roll on the Printer and Removing it from the Printer on Section 2 in the User's Guide. Use Our-recommended paper. See Consumables on Appendix in the User's Guide. Set the paper correctly. See Replacing the Paper Roll on Section 2 in the User's Guide. Remove any foreign material. See Clearing Paper Jams on Section 5 in the User's Guide. Print in 20C or higher environment temperature.
Print speed is slow
4-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Measures to Be Taken When the Plotter Malfunctions

Problem A no-ink message is displayed when there is enough ink. Abnormal sound Possible cause The ink bottle is not installed correctly. Corrective measure Check whether the joint is inserted into the ink bottle.
The motor seems to be defective.
Test the actuator in maintenance mode to check operation.
Measures to Solve Print Quality Problems When a Print Error Occurs

Symptom A blank sheet of paper is output or the printed drawing is faded. Parts of a drawing are missing or the print is unclear. The print is blurred. Possible cause Blank data is transmitted. The environmental conditions do not meet the printer specifications. The paper is set incorrectly. Foreign objects are attached to the head. The paper is loaded upside down. The paper is set incorrectly. The heater temperature is too low. The leading edge of the paper is curled. The paper is slightly wrinkled. Wrinkles are caused by inappropriate setting of paper. Stains on the platen may be transferred. The environmental conditions do not meet the printer specifications. Clogged nozzle. Corrective measure Check print data. Increase room temperature to 15C or higher (preferably, 23C) and warm up the printer sufficiently. Check the paper settings. Clean the head from the CLEANING menu. Check whether the paper is loaded correctly. Check the paper settings. Raise the heater temperature. Check whether the leading edge of the paper is curled. If it is curled, cut the leading edge. If it wrinkles, feed the paper and cut off the wrinkled part of the paper. Set the paper correctly. -Wipe off stains on the platen. -Wipe off stains on the head base. Use the printer n the recommended environment. Turn ON the head warm up. Perform fill cap operation.
The printed surface is stained.
Parts of a drawing are missing at start of print. Parts of a drawing are missing even when cleaning is performed repeatedly. Print quality is not improved even when performing the cleaning.
Stains on the cap or wiper may be trans ferred.
Wipe off stains on the cap and wiper using the cleaning liquid.
4-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 4 Troubleshooting (General)
Measures to Be Taken When the Heater Mulfunctions

Symptom LCD on the heater control panel cannnot be lightend Characters cannot be displayed on the heater control panel LCD. Possible cause The power supply (PSU-XW1x) and HCP board (heater control board) are connected through DC-CBL-5V/12V (64) incorreclly. HCP board is malfunctioned HCP board is malfunctioned. Corrective measure Connect the, correctly.
Replace the heater control panel. Replace the heater control panel.
"POWER ON HEATER POWER SWITCH" appears on the heater control panel LCD.
The heater does not become hot even when performing the heater test. ("+" is displayed. The preset temperature and the current temperature are displayed.) The heater does not become hot even when performing the heater test. ("+" is displayed. The preset temperature and the current temperature are displayed.) The heater does not become hot during print even through the heater becomes hot in the heater test. Abnormal temperature is displayed. The heater temperature becomes extremely high. "INITIALIZING" continuously appears on the LCD of the heater control panel.
The AC power is not connected to the heater power inlet on the wiper sider of the back of the printer. The heater power breaker on the wiper side of the back of the printer is not turned ON (1). The RLY board and HCP board are not connected through RLY-B-CTL cable ASSY. The RLY board is malfunctioned. The HCP board is malfunctioned. The HCP board is malfunctioned.
Connect the AC power to the heater power inlet. Turn ON (1) the breaken switch.
Connect them correctly.
Replace the RLY board. Replace the heater control panel. Replace the heater control panel.
"POWER SAVE MODE" continuously appears on the LCD of the heater control panel.
The HCP board and the RLY board are not connected through the RLY-B-CTL cable ASSY. The power voltage alternation switch ASSY and heaters are not connected. The HCP board is malfunctioned. The RLY board is malfunctioned. The heater is malfunctioned. The ENG-IF cable is not connected. The HCP board is malfunctioned. (Serial interface circuit) The IPB1 board is malfunctioned. (Serial interface circuit) The ENG-IF cable is majfunctioned. The THRM cable ASSY is not connected. The HCP board is malfunctioned. The thermistor is malfunctioned. The THRM cable is connected wrongly. The HCP board is malfunctioned. The RLY board is malfunctioned. The heater control panel is not connected correctly to the IPB1 board with the ENG-IF cable. Malfunction of the heater control panel. Malfunction of the IPB1 board. The heater control panel is not connected correctly to the power supply unit (PSU-XW1X). Malfunction of the heater control panel. Malfunction of the power supply unit (PSU-XW1X). Malfunction of the IPB1 board.
Connect them correctly.
Connect them correctly. Replace the heater control panel. Replace the RLY board ASSY. Replace the heater. Connect that correctly. Replace the heater control panel. Replace the IPB1 board. Replace the ENG-IF cable. Connect that correctly. Replace the heater control panel. Replace the thermistor ASSY. Connect that correctly. Replace the heater control panel. Replace the RLY board. Make a correct connection. Replace the heater panel. Replace the IPB1 board. Make a correct connection. Replace the heater control panel. Replace the power supply unit. Replace the IPB1 board.
4-3
(Blank Page)
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 5 Troubleshooting (Engine and SCSI Controllers)
Section 5 Troubleshooting (Engine and SCSI Controllers)
This section describes how to troubleshoot engine or SCSI controller errors. If a print quality defect occurs, no error appears on the LCD in most cases. If the printer has other troubles, the error lamp lights and an error message appears on the LCD. Print quality defects are judged by nozzle check patterns. If an error message appears, check the cause and location of the trouble according to the error message and take appropriate measure. If no error message is displayed, determine the cause and location and take appropriate measure.
5.1
Print Quality Defects

If a print quality defect occurs, no error message appears on the LCD in most cases. A print quality defect caused by a head cannot be detected by printing a nozzle check pattern. The ajudgement criteria for print quality defects caused by heads during installation or operation are described below. 1) 2) Check patterns should be in the failure mode range that can be checked with nozzle check patterns. Determine whether it is caused by the electrical system or ink system. (1) All heads are faulty. --- Electrical system (2) One head is faulty. Replace the FFC connected to the head with another head, and output a pattern. - If the symptom appears with the head --- Ink system or head - If the symptom appears with another head --- Electrical system
5-1
3)
Isolation when the ink system is defective (1) If ink cannot be filled If ink is not absorbed, the possible causes are as follows: The cap is stained--------------------------- Clean the cap with the cap cleaning liquid. The capping position is incorrect. -------- Correct the capping position. (See 8.9) Capping adsorption defect --------------- Replace the cap unit or parts. (pump ASSY, cap ASSY, olyfis, or sensor (AIR) Bent ink supply tube ---------------------- Correct the tube. The head nozzle is stained --------------- Charge the wipe cleaning liquid. Height of the capping unit is incorrect - Correct height of the capping unit (See 8.10). (2) If there is air remaining in the ink tube Even if there is a little air in the ink tube, it does not affect printing. However, if thereis much air, an ejection error may occur. Insufficient cap adsorption ---------------- Replace the cap unit or parts. Tube air leak -------------------------------- Tighten joints. Head air leak -------------------------------- Replace the head. Measure to be taken if a head is defective If an ejection defect is caused by a head, take the following measure. If the problem is not solved, replace the head. (1) Manual cleaning Cleaning in user mode When this function is executed, air and dust in the head are removed and meniscus is correctly formed. The problem is mostly solved by manual cleaning. The procedure is described in 8.13.2. (2) Fill cap Perform this function in the User mode. This function charges ink into the cap, immerses the head (surface) in ink, leaves the printer for a while to solve the nozzle choking. Use this function when print missing cannot be solved even though performing the cleaning repeatedly. Leave the printer for one or two hours after performing this function. Instruct users to contact our service centers if the printer cannot be recovered after leaving for 24 hours. (3) Ink drain If the problem is not solved by above steps 1 and 2, there may be air inside the head and it cannot be discharged. In this case, leave the printer as it is for a while (1 or 2 hours) or remove ink and refill refresh ink. (Use a new waste ink bottle when removing ink.) See 8.12 for a detailed procedure. Leave the printer more than one hour after charging ink. (4) Cleaning with refresh ink If the printer is transported or left unused for a long time, the problem may not be solved by draining ink. In this case, it is recommended to clean the ink tube, sub-tank, air damper filter, head filter, and nozzles using maintenance fluid cartridges. (Use a new waste ink bottle for this cleaning.) See 8.13.5 for a detailed procedure.
4)
5-2
5)
If it is caused by head rubbing or paper jam If paper jams or rubbing occurs frequently, the head nozzle plate may be damaged.
In this case, nozzle dots may not miss, but deflection may occur, causing a poor print quality. The head height must be checked.
Use the optimum paper, set paper correctly, and use the correct environment.
If the problem cannot be fixed, replace the head itself. 6)
If nozzle missing increases

Verify the head voltage. See and set the recommend voltage written on the head.
7)
Ink adhesion If ink adhere to the carridge cable and the head cable, wipe it up immediately. If the carridge cable or the head cable is damaged, replace it.
5-3
5.2
Error Message Types

Error messages are classified according to details of troubles as follows: 1 Operator call errors These errors can be corrected by the operator. 2Warning These errors can be corrected by the operator and include the following: Communication error Winder timeout 3 Service call errors These errors must be corrected by service personnel. Power-on self-diagnostic error Engine error System error
5-4
5.3
Operator Call Errors

The following errors can be corrected by the operator. <Ink cartridge> (1) Ink cartridge
OPEN X INKCOVER CHANGE YY INK
X : L (Left) / R (right) YY : Y, M, C, Bk, Lc, Lm
Description: Measure:
There is no ink. Take appropriate measure according to the message. X : L (Left) / R (right) YY : Y, M, C, Bk, Lc, Lm
OPEN X INKCOVER SET YY INK
An ink cartridge is not installed.
(1) Recovery according to guidance. Check installation to see if the cartridge is mounted properly. (2) Check loose connection of the cartridge electrode. Check the cartridge, and if the electrode gets dirty, clean it. Correct the board in the cartridge if it is mounted askew or decentered. If this does not solve the problem, replace the cartridge (3) Check the connection of the connector of the INK2 board. (4) Replace the cartridge box, (Do not loosen the screws of the INK2 board, If the position of screws deviates, the contact of the electrode is displaced. (5) Replace the IPB1 board.
OPEN X INKCOVER CHECK YY INK
X : L (Left) / R (Right) YY : Y, M, C, Bk, Lc, Lm Z : Type of error 1: Check sun error 2: Different color 3: Different type (OEM code) 4: Hash error 5: Write error 6: Upper limit error 7: Serial ID I/O error 8: Different custom serial ID 9: Ink remaining history error
Ink cartridge error.
Take appropriate measure according to the message. * If this error occurs immediately after the cartridge is replaced, the cartridge just replaced should be suspected in addition to the cartridges of ink colors indicated in the guidance. (1) Recovery according to guidance. Check installation to see if the cartridge is mounted properly. (2) Check loose connection of the cartridge electrode. Check the cartridge, and if the electrode gets dirty, clean it. Correct the board in the cartridge if it is mounted askew or decentered. If this does not solve the problem, replace the cartridge
5-5
(3) Check the connection of the connector of the INK2 board. (4) Replace the cartridge box, (Do not loosen the screws of the INK2 board, If the position of screws deviates, the contact of the electrode is displaced. (5) Replace the IPB1 board.
(2)
Ink cover
INKCOVER IS OPEN CLOSE X INKCOVER
X : L (Left) / R (right)
The ink cover open.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Recovery according to guidance. Check mounting of the cartridge cover switch. Check connection of the INK2 board. Replace the cartridge box, (Do not loosen the screws of the INK2 board, If the position of screws deviates, the contact of the electrode is displaced. (5) Replace the IPB1 board.
(3)
Ink remainWarning
The ink LED flashes.(No message guidance) Description: Ink is running out. (Warning) Measure: Replace the ink cartridge.
5-6
<Waste ink> (1) Waste ink bottle is not mounted.

BOTTLE ISNT SET SET BOTTLE
Measure:
(1) Check the waste ink bottle is properly secured. (2) Check connection the switch of the waste ink bottle, mounting and connection of the connector. (3) Replace the waste ink bottle if the switch or connector of the waste ink bottle is broken by ink.
(2)
Waste ink bottle is full.

WASTE INK FULL CHANGE BOTTLE
<Paper> (1) Paper jam

LIFT LEVER & OPEN REAR COVER 1
LIFT LEVER & OPEN REAR COVER
(2)
Paper
LIFT LEVER SET PAPER
Paper runs out.
(1) Set new paper. (2) If the error is not reset after the paper is not set, malfunction of the feeder sensor or discharge sensor may be the cause of error, Check installation of the sensor and connection of the connector, Clean the sensor. (3) If the error continues to occur, or the sensor is damaged, replace the sensor. (4) Some kinds of paper are hard to be detected by the sensor, Try other type of paper. (5) Infrared rays are used for detection, Malfunction may be caused by strong light from outside.
Invalid paper size (paper edge cannot be detected).
(1) Set paper with a correct size. (2) If the error continues to occur, malfunction of the edge sensor may be the cause of error. Check installation of the sensor and
5-7
connection of the connector. Clean the sensor. (3) If the error continues to occur, or the sensor is damaged, replace the sensor. (4) Some kinds of paper are hard to be detected by the sensor, Try other type of paper.
Paper skew occurred. Set paper correctly. Check paper skew.
(3)
Lever
SET PAPER PUSH DOWN LEVER
Measure:
If the message remains to appear after the lever is put down, malfunction of the lever sensor may be the cause of error, Check installation of the sensor and connection of the connector, If the error continues to occur, or the sensor is damaged, replace the sensor.
5-8
Rear cover
CLOSE REAR COVER
Measure:
Check if the rear cover is not loose. If the message remains to appear after the cover is opened then closed, malfunction of the interlock switch may be the cause of error, Check installation of the sensor and connection of the connector, If the error continues to occur, or the switch is damaged, replace the switch.
Temperature (1) Abnormal head temperature

HEAD TEMP. ERROR WAIT A MOMENT
Measure:
Use it within the operating temperature range. Leave the printer for a while until the head temperature falls within the range.
(2)
Abnormal ambient temperature

ENV. TEMP. ERROR CHANGE CONDITION
Measure:
Check the ambient temperature. Check the environment thermistor. Replace the IPB1 board.
Winder
The error LED flashes (warning) if the winder time out has occurred.
If the rewind motor locks up, check that paper or scroller is caught on something and does not move. Check the slack sensors.
5-9
5.4
Warning
5.4.1
Communication errors
A communication error indicates that there is a problem in communication conditions or protocol with the SCSI connection between the printer and the computer.
PRINT READY W SCSI ERROR nnn
nnn: Error code
Error description Parity error Bus timeout error
Error state display W SCSI ERROR 001 W SCSI ERROR 002
Measures
(1) (2) (3) (4) Check SCSI cable connection and terminator switch. Turn the host SCSI parity bit setting ON. Check the host SCSI driver setting. Replace WIM1 board.
5.4.2
Winder timeout
The winder slack sensor is kept ON and paper is not wound. The error LED flashes.
Measures
(1) (2) Remove the paper at the slack sensor. Place paper on the winding paper core correctly.
5-10
5.5
Service Call Errors

The following error messages indicate the errors that must be corrected by service personnel. HINT Reference If a service call error message is displayed, the user should be advised to turn the power switch off and on again and check whether the error occurs again. This may eliminate the error.
5.5.1
Self-diagnostic errors at power on

An error is detected in the engine during power-on self-diagnosis (POC). Get information of error condition; time of occurrence, frequency of error, operation right before error occurrence, and operating temperature. An error code is displayed in hexadecimal figure. POC error codes correspond to bits as follows. When multiple errors are occurred, the hexadecimal figure that are added with each error code is displayed. Example: E0850 is indicated when NVRAM error, power failure and FPGA (ICB) error occur.
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13,14,15 Error code 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 0080 0100 0200 0400 0800 1000 Diagnosis Internal RAM SRAM Flash ROM PIO NVRAM FPGA (IPB) FPGA (ICB) ASIC CONF (IPB) ASIC CONF (ICB) DRAM SCSI register Power supply SCSI board Result 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormal Reserved
5-11
5.5.1.1
Internal RAM Description
(0001)
The read/write of the RAM built in the CPU was diagnosed, and an error was detected.
Defective module
(1) IPB1 board.
Measure to be taken
(1) The CPU may be defective. Replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.1.2
SRAM Description
(0002)
The read/write of the SRAM on the IPB1 board was diagnosed, and an error was detected.
Defective module
(1) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) The CPU, SRAM, or BRP may be defective. Replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.1.3
Flash ROM Description
(0004)
The program area in the flash ROM is sum-checked, and it could not be read correctly, causing an error.
Defective module
(1) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Install the program again. (2) Replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.1.4
PIO Description
(0008)
Perform a read/write test on a specific PIO and diagnose whether it can be read and written correctly.
Defective module
(1) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) The PIO device may be defective. Replace the IPB1 board.
5-12
5.5.1.5
NVRAM Description
(0010)
Check whether the NVRAM read/write (specific blank area) can be performed correctly and whether engine parameters can be read correctly by check-sum. The RTC (Real Time Clock) test is not performed. This error means damage of the IC or parameter error. When this error was occurred at power-on-self diagnosis (POC), perform read/write check and read check-sum three times. If the error cannot be solved, the NVRAM contents at the previous powering OFF is reloaded and engine error 11Ax (x: 2, 3, 4) is displayed. (In this case, E0010 will not be displayed.) When other errors NVRAM error is occurred, the above recovery is not performed and this error code is only displayed.
Defective module
(1) NVRAM (2) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
When multiple errors that includes NVRAM have occurred, take a measure for errors except NVRAM, first. Turn on the printer after solving the errors except NVRAM. Only NVRAM error recovery will be performed. The NVRAM is not backed up error condition. If error 11Ax is occurred even at turning on the printer, take appropriate measure by following to engine error 11Ax.
5-13
Measure to be taken when the error cannot be soled by auto- error correction The damage of the backed up contents of the NVRAM, NVRAM device defectives, or IPB1 board defectives will be possible. Take appropriate measure by following to the NVRAM Error Measure, Flow Diagram. NVRAM Error Measure Flow Diagram
POC, NVRAM error (E0010) NVRAM INIT (Cause) Parameter sum check error Write / Read check error
Power on the printer (OFF/ON)
OKNVRAM chip is not inferior. NGNVRAM chip malfunction or hardware malfunction. NGMounting inferior
NOTE1 Check whether the NVRAM is mounted on the WEC board correctly.
Check mount of the NVRAM and WIM1.
OK
Mount the NVRAM and WIN1 again.
NG
OK
Replace the NVRAM
NVRAM inferior
NVRAM INIT
OK
Do you replace the board?
NO
NG
Replace the WEC board
YES
Restore NVRAM
NVRAM INIT
OK
NG
OK
Restore SETTING
Input the NVRAM parameter on the operation panel See Section 5.8 (3)
NG
End End
5-14
5.5.1.6
FPGA (IPB) Description
(0020)
The read/write of the FPGA-ATG and FPGA-RSM registers on the IPB1 board was diagnosed, and an error was detected.
Defective module
(1) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
Replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.1.7
FPGA (ICB) Description
(0040)
The read/write of the FPGA-PTC and FPGA-PDD registers on the IPB1 board was diagnosed, and an error was detected.
Defective module
(1) IPB1 board (2) Carriage cable (3) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Replace the ICB1 board. (2) Check whether the carriage cable is plugged or not. (3) Replace IPB1 board.
5.5.1.8
ASIC CONF (IPB1) Description
(0080)
The program load from the flash ROM on the IPB1 board to the ASIC on the IPB1 board or sum-check was not performed correctly, and an error was occurred.
Defective module
(1) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Reload the ASIC program from the IC card. (2) Replace the IPB1 board.
5-15
5.5.1.9
ASIC CONF (ICB1) Description
(0100)
The program load from the flash ROM on the IPB1 board to the ASIC on the ICB1 board or sum-check was not performed correctly, and an error was occurred.
Defective module
(1) IPB1 board (2) Carriage cable (3) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Reload the ASIC program from the IC card. (2) Check whether the carriage cable is plugged correctly. (3) Replace the ICB1 board. (4) Replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.1.10
SCSI board
(0200)
Description
The WIM1 board is not installed.
Defective module
(1) WIM1 board (2) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Check whether the WIM1 board is installed correctly. (2) Replace the WIM1 board. (3) There is a possibility that this error occurs due to a defective IPB1 board. Replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.1.11
SCSI register
(0400)
Description
The read/write of the SCSI protocol controller on the WIM1 board was diagnosed, and an error was detected.
Defective module
(1) WIM1 board (2) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Check whether the WIM1 board is installed correctly. (2) Replace the WIM1 board. (3) There is a possibility that this error occurs due to a defective IPB1 board. Replace the IPB1 board.
5-16
5.5.1.12
DRAM
(0200)
Description
The read/write of the image band memory on the IPB1 board was diagnosed, and an error was detected.
Defective module
(1) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.1.13
POWER SUPPLY (+36, +24, +12 V)
(800)
Description
The power supplies of +36, +24, and +12 V PC are diagnosed, and the power supplies could not be detected.
Defective module
(1) Interlock switch or wire harness of the rear cover. (2) Fuses (F1, F2, F3) on the IPB1 board. (3) Power supply unit and wire harness (3) (4) IPB1 board When the power supply is in short-circuit; (5) ICB1 board and FFC (4) (6) VDD2 board (7) Others
Measure to be taken
(1) Check interlock switch Observe lighting condition of LED2 (+ 5 V), LED7 (+ 12 V), LED9 (+ 24 V), LED11 (+ 36 VM), and LED13 (+ 36 VH) on the IPB1 board. + 36 VM and + 36 VH are distributed from one power supply source, but they are separated for convenience on the IPB1 board. + 36 VM is applied for motors. + 36 VH is applied for head drive. If the rear cover is not closed correctly, 36 V may not be applied. (2) Turn off the power, measure resistance of fuses to check. (3) Check whether correct voltages are supplied from the power source. (See tables) (4) There is a possibility that this error occurs due to a defective IPB1 board. Replace the IPB1 board.
5-17
(5) Check whether the power is in short-circuit or not. The power source has a over-current protection circuit. When over-current on the + 5 V (short-circuit) is detected, all DC outputs are turned off. When over-current on + 12 V, + 24 V, or 36 V (short-circuit) is detected, three DC outputs except 5 V are turned off. Measure a resistance of the DC cable after unplugging CN on the IPB1 board. If the resistance is extremely low, the power is in short-circuit. Note that the power does not supplied for a while, 10 minutes after turning on. Check points of the power supply voltages
Power line 5V +12V +24V +36V Measuring position (on the IPB1 board) TP35 TP50 TP34 TP93, TP33 Normal value +4.75V to +5.25V +11.00V to +13.00V +23.00V to +25.00V +35.00V to +37.00V
Check points of the power supply voltages

Power line +1.5V +3.3V +5VREF Measuring position (on the IPB1 board) TP70 TP69 TP36 Normal value +1.45V to +1.55V +3.20V to +3.40V +4.90V to +5.10V
Note Use the power supply JLSI-005C1 specified for the IP-6600 printer. Some nations require revision B or later power supply from safety regulations. The revision of the power supply is shown in the last figure of the serial number. (Example: 3AJ0001A ---- Version A)
5-18
5.5.2
Engine error
An error is detected in the engine. Restart the engine. If the error is not solved, contact our service centers. Get information of error condition; time of occurrence, frequency of the error, operation right before error occurrence, and operating temperature. When an engine error is occurred, take the following measures; (1) Replace the module that is specified as a defective part I the error message. (2) When multiple defective parts are possible, separate the defective part. Enter the maintenance mode by performing the CANCEL-SHIFT Power-on in the Special Power-On Procedure (See 5.10), and check whether the circuit works correctly using actuator function and monitor function. These functions can be performed even when an engine error is occurred. When the rear cover is opened, 36 V is not supplied.
Error description GA_ATG block clear error GA_ATG DMA transfer error Vacuum fan error Flash PROM write error Home position sensor error Wiping motor, wiping sensor error Temperature sensor error Capping motor error VDD2 variable power error NVRAM error Up date error Cap position error Cooling fan error Long term storage error Head drive IC error Head temperature error Edge sensor error Sub-tank sensor (Full or Half) error Ink supply sensor error Sub tank supply error FFC cable connection error Servo motor error *1) x: *2) x: *3) x: *4) x: Error state display ENGINE ERROR 1110 ENGINE ERROR 1111 ENGINE ERROR 112X [x: 0: wipe 1: center 2: cap] ENGINE ERROR 1140 ENGINE ERROR 1150 ENGINE ERROR 1160 ENGINE ERROR 1170 ENGINE ERROR 1180 ENGINE ERROR 119x [x: channel number] ENGINE ERROR 11AX [x: error number (*4)] ENGINE ERROR 11B0 ENGINE ERROR 11C0 ENGINE ERROR 11D0 ENGINE ERROR 11E0 ENGINE ERROR 120x [x: thermistor number (*2)] ENGINE ERROR 121x [x: head number(*1)] ENGINE ERROR 1220 ENGINE ERROR 123x [X: head number (*1)] ENGINE ERROR 124x [X: head number (*1)] ENGINE ERROR 125x [X: head number (*1)] ENGINE ERROR 126x [ (*3)] ENGINE ERROR 1700
0= No. 1 head, 1= No. 2 head.....5= No. 6 head 0= TH2, 1= TH6, 2= TH3, 3= TH7, 4= TH4, 5= TH8, 6= TH5 (Thx: Location on ICB board.) 0= CN9, 1= CN10, 2= CN11, 3= CN12 cables 0.2= sum error, 3= version error, 4= read/write error
5-19
5.5.2.1
Engine error 1110: GA_ATG block clear error Description

The ATG band memory block erase does not end. This error is checked at power on start and print.
Defective module
(1) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
5.5.2.2
Engine error 1110: GA_ATG DMA error Description

The DMA circuit is in the input part of the FPGA-ATG on the IPB1 board and the drawing data from the host PC is received via the WIM board. This error shows some error exist in the data path. This error is checked during print.
Defective module
(1) Host PC or SCSI cable (2) WIM1 board (3) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Check whether a host PC and a SCSI cable are connected correctly and there is no defect in the host side. (2) Replace the WIM1 board. (3) Replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.2.3
Engine error 112X: Vacuum fan error Description

x= 0: The vacuum fan (lower part of the platen, wipe side) does not run. x= 1: The vacuum fan (lower part of the platen, center) does not run. x= 2: The vacuum fan (lower part of the platen, cap side) does not run. This error is checked at print.
Defective module
(1) Vacuum fan (2) Sensor cable (3) IPB1 board
5-20
Measure to be taken
(1) Enter the maintenance mode by performing the CANCEL-SHIFT Power on in the Special Power on Procedure (See 5.9), and check whether the fan motor rotates correctly by controlling the fan motor in the actuator menu. (2) Replace the vacuum fan. (3) Check the sensor cable. (4) When this error cannot be solved even though the fan is replaced, there is a possibility of defect of the drive circuit. Replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.2.4
Engine error 1140: Flash ROM write error Description

A time-out error occurs when the NVRAM contents are being saved in the flash memory in maintenance mode. Erasing does not end. This error is checked at shut down of the printer and back up from the operation panel.
Defective module
(1) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
5.5.2.5
Engine error 1150: Home position sensor error Description

The carriage cannot be moved to its home position. This error is checked at power-on-start of the printer and closing the rear cover.
Defective module
(1) Home position sensor (2) Sensor cable (3) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Enter the maintenance mode by performing CANCEL-SHIFT power-on in the Special Power-On Procedure (See 5.10). Enter the Home Position Sensor menu from the Monitor menu. Check whether 1 is displayed when the carriage is in its home position. In the condition that the Y motor is not excited at open state of the cap, check whether the display is changed when the carriage is moved manually. (Note so that the ink does not drop.) (2) Check the sensor cable whether there is no disconnect on of connectors and no cutting of harnesses. (3) Replace the IPB1 board.
5-21
5.5.2.6
Engine error 1160: Wiping error Description

When the wiping motor is run for a while, the sensor does not make a response that indicates that the motor turns one turn. This error is checked during wipe.
Defective module
(1) Wiping unit (including wiping motor and wipe sensor.) (2) Sensor cable (3) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
Check whether the wiper turns one turn and the wipe sensor detects the turn during the initializing sequence at powering on the printer. A When the wiper does not turn. (1) Check whether there is no step-out of the gears when the wiper does not turn one turn even though the motor turns. (2) Check whether 24 V is supplied to the IPB1 board with the circuit tester when the motor does not turn. When the motor does not turn even though the + 24 V is supplied, there is a possibility of the capping motor defect. Replace the capping unit. (3) Check the sensor cable. (4) There is a possibility of a motor drive circuit defect. Replace the IPB1 board. B When the wiper turns (1) Check whether the wipe sensor can be switched ON and OFF by rotating the wiper. Check whether the lever type switch is not loosen. (2) Check the sensor cable. (3) Replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.2.7
Engine error 1170: Temperature sensor error Description

The thermistor for temperature measurement in the printer detects an abnormal temperature. (-10C or lower or 85C or higher) This error is checked at all times.
Defective module
(1) Ambient thermistor sensor (AMB THRM ASSY) (2) Sensor cable (3) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Use the printer under the print guaranteed temperature range. When the ambient temperature is -10 C or lower or 85 C or higher. (2) Replace the ambient temperature sensor. (3) Check the sensor cable. (4) Replace the IPB1 board.
5-22
5.5.2.8
Engine error 1180: Capping motor error Description

Capping motor over current is detected. The error also occurs when the load of the capping motor is extremely high. This error is checked at all times.
Defective module
(1) Capping unit (tube, pump motor) (2) Sensor cable (3) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) When the ambient temperature is low, a tube of the pump motor becomes hard and load of the motor is increased. Use the printer under the operation guaranteed temperature range. (2) The capping unit has a torque timitter for up and down operation. Therefore, the capping unit does not occurs over current. (3) The rotation of the capping unit gear is worse, put grease on the shaft of the gear. (4) Enter the maintenance mode by performing the CANCEL-SHIFT power-on in the special Power-On Procedure (See 5.10). Enter the pump solenoids 1 and 2 from the actuator menu, and open the fresh air by turning on the solenoids 1 and 2. Enter the pump motor and check whether the motor drive circuit and the motor work correctly by rotationing the motor back and forward. When the home position parameter is set to 0, it is judged that the home position is not adjusted and the capping is not available. (The forward rotation of the pump motor is not available even in the actuator menu.) Check whether connectors are not off and harnesses are not cut. (5) When the motor cannot be rotated, replace the capping unit. (6) Check the sensor cable. (7) Replace the IPB1 board.
5-23
5.5.2.9
Engine error 119X: VDD2 variable power supply error Description

Output voltages of the VDD2 board are abnormal. ON wave voltage and OFF wave voltage should be more than 12 V and more than 6 V respectively. This error is checked during print.
X= 0 1 2 3 4 5
Channel Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 (*1)
Head Lc, Y Bk, Lm M, C Lc, Y Bk, Lm M, C
Use for ON wave for ON wave for ON wave for OFF wave for OFF wave for OFF wave
Voltage (*1) 20 to 24V 20 to 24V 20 to 24V 12 to 14V 12 to 14V 12 to 14V
Check point TP4: PWON1 TP5: PWON1 TP6: PWON1 TP7: PWOFF 1 TP8: PWOFF 1 TP9: PWOFF 1
LED D27 D30 D33 D26 D29 D32
Normal output voltage at normal temperature.

5V TP1 D28 12V TP2 D31 24V TP3 D34 TP4 D27 TP5 D30 TP6 D33 TP7 D26 TP8 D29 TP9 D32
LEDs and Check pins around CN12 on the ICB1 board.
Defective module
(1) ICB1 board (2) VDD2 board (3) Carridge cable (4) IPB1 board (5) Main power supply (6) Defective interlock switch
Measure to be taken
(1) Check whether 36 V is supplied to the IPB1 board. If not, the followings are considerable causes. Main power supply defect The rear cover is opened (2) Preset the VDD voltage from the diagnostics menu. Check voltages of the channels that occur errors on the ICB1 board by a circuit tester. The voltage supply condition is check at the LEDs. (3) When the voltage is supplied, the voltage check circuit is defective. Replace the ICB1 board. AD converters for checking the voltage level are on the ICB1 board. (4) When the voltage is not supplied, replace the VDD2 board. (5) There is a possibility of short-circuit of the VDD2 output line. Perform short-circuit test on the ICB1 board. Check whether the carridge cable is not damaged. Preset voltage for VDD + 4 V is output as the VDD2 voltage.
5-24
5.5.2.10
Engine error 11AX: NVRAM error
Description
The data in the NVRAM is incorrect. The self diagnosis at powering on checks read/write and sum-check errors. Internally the program retries those checks three times and when this error cannot be solved in three time checks, the data in the NVRAM backed up at the previous powering off is written to the NVRAM and this error is displayed. 11A0=Check-sum error (during operation) 11A2=Check-sum error 11A3=Version error 11A4=Read/write error When a check-sum error is detected at revise of data of the NVRAM, this error is displayed. Related section: 5.5.1 Self-diagnostic errors at power on (5.5.1.5 NVRAM) 3.5 System Information Management
Defective module
(1) NVRAM (2) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
Turn on the printer again and check whether the error is solved. When the error cannot be solved, turn on the printer by skipping the POC. Initialize the NVRAM and restore the back up information. Turn on the printer again after powering off. When the error cannot be solved, restore setting value at shipping and turn on the printer after turning off. If the error cannot be solved yet, there is a possibility of mounting defect of the NVRAM to the IC socket. Check whether the NVRAM is mounted to the IC socket correctly. If the NVRAM is mounted upside down or in the wrong position, the NVRAM is broken. Replace the NVRAM. When the error cannot be solved by remounting the NVRAM correctly, replace the NVRAM. If the error cannot be solved yet, replace the IPB1 board.
5-25
5.5.2.11
Engine error 11C0: Cap position error
Description
The error is displayed when there is more than 2 mm gap of position detected by two carridge position sensors at capping operation. Two carridge position sensors: PWMGA on the IPB board and PTG (FPGA) on the ICB board.
Measure to be taken
(1) Verify that there is no stain on the T-fence. (2) Verify that the linear scale is mounted correctly and the connector is connected correctly. (3) Verify that the FFC cable and the connector are connected correctly. (4) Replace ICB board. (5) Replace IBP board.
5.5.2.12
Engine error 11D0: Cooling fan error
Description
When the head temperature becomes more than 43C, the printer observes whether the head temperature drops under 43C during print. This error is displayed as cooling fan error when the head temperature cannot become under 43C for 10 minutes.
Measure to be taken
Verify that the head cooling fan works good. If the head cooling fan does not work good, replace the fan. Verify that the printer cooling fan works good. If the printer cooling fan does not work good, replace the fan.
5.5.2.13
Engine error 11E0: Long term strage error
Description
When the printer has been left in power off state for more than one month (31 days) , user unrecoverable error is displayed. When the service clean (for long term storage) is performed before turing the printer off, this error is not displayed. When the head wash (return sequence after service clean) is performed, the printer returns to the ormal error observation state. This error cannot be cleared by normal power ON/OFF.
Measure to be taken
Turn the printer on by error skip mode ( + + POWER ), input the POWE passward, and initialize the internal error flag. Clear the error by turning the printer off (not turning the breaker off) and turning the printer on again. Before restarting the printer: (1) Replace the pump assy. (2) Replace the waste ink tube. (3) Check that hardened ink sticks to inner wall of the supply pump tube, and if so, replace the supply tube.
5-26
5.5.2.14
Engine error 120X: Head drive IC error
Description
The piezo drive IC on a head is too hot (85 C or higher) or too low (-10 C or lower). The head drive voltage + 4 V that is supplied to the VDD board is generated from 36 V power supply. The ICB1 board that has a 2nd voltage control circuit generates the accurate voltage needed for the head. The 2nd voltage control circuit is easy to hot. This error is check at all times.
Defective module
(1) ICB1 board (2) Head cable (3) Head
Measure to be taken
(1) Check temperature of the head drive circuit on the ICB1 board. If it is extremely high, check short-circuit of the head and head cable corresponding to the element using a tester. Short-circuit may be caused by incorrect insertion of the head cable, internal failure of the head, or foreign matter attached to the ICB1 board. (2) Replace the head. (3) Replace the ICB1 board.
5.5.2.15
Engine error 121X: Head temperature error

x: 0= No. 1 head (Bk), 1= No. 2 head (Lm), .....5= No. 6 head (Lc)
Description
The head temperature is too low or too high (- 10 C or lower, 85 C or higher). (The that measure the PZT temperature malfunction.) When the head temperature rises at normal print, the temperature control such as addition of wait time words so that the temperature does not exceed 40 C .
Defective module
(1) Head cable (2) ICB1 board (3) Head
Measure to be taken
(1) When the actual environmental temperature is not abnormal, there is a possibility of cut of the circuit. Identify the errored color head from the lowest digit figure in the error number and check whether cables are connected securely and the head cable is not damaged. (2) The A/D conversion circuit is on the ICB1 board. Therefore, replace the ICB1 board. (3) Rarely there is a possibility of the thermistor malfunction in the head.
5-27
5.5.2.16
Engine error 1220: Edge sensor error
Description
The printer checks the paper width during the initializing sequence at powering on. The printer adjusts sensibility of the edge sensor using unreftected tape or the platen where the paper does not exist. If the desired sensitivity cannot be obtaind at adjustment, this error is generated. If paper or foreign material exists on the check point on the unreflected tape, the printer cannot adjust correctly and this error is generated.
Defective module
(1) Edge sensor module (2) ICB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Enter to the maintenance mode using cancel-shift powering on described on 5.9 Special Power-On Procedure. Enter to the edge sensor in the engine sensors from the monitor menu. Check whether there is a response when the white paper is inserted and drawed under the edge sensor. When there is a response, the edge sensor words correctly. (2) When there is no response, replace the edge sensor. (3) Replace the ICB1 board. The ICB1 board converts the sensor lever analog to digital value.
5.5.2.17
Engine error 123x: Sub-tank sensor error (Full or Half)
Description
x: 0= No. 1 head (Bk), 1= No. 2 head (Lm) ....5= No. 6 head (C) The half sensors and full sensors on the sub-tanks are defective. The sensors detect full state even though the sub-tank is not in half state actually. This error is checked during print. Sensor logic (Both sensors generate 1 if the connector is disconnected)
Empty Half sensor Full sensor 1 0 More than half and less the full 0 0 Full 0 1 Connector disconnection 1 x Connector disconnection x 1
When the half sensor is defective, (1: Half sensor, 1: Full sensor) is detected at full state and the error is generated. When the full sensor is defective, (1: Half sensor, 1: Full sensor) is detected at empty state (at ink initial charge), the error is generated. Also, the ink is detected as full at the state that the ink is more than half and less than full, so the ink cannot be charged more than this and when the ink is less than half, (1: Half sensor, 1: Full sensor) is detected and the error is generated.
5-28
Defective module
(1) Sub-tank sensor: Half, Full (2) Sub-tank sensor relay cable (L/R), Sub-tank sensor cable (L/R) (3) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Enter to the maintenance mode using cancel-shift powering on described in 5.10 Specia Power-On Procedure. Enter to the sub-tank sensor full x half x (x= 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) from the monitor menu. When there is a response of the sensor by moving the sensor plate of the sub-tank manually, the sensor works correctly. When the connector of the sensor is disconnected, the full sensor turns to 1 (full state) and the half sensor turns to !1 (empty state). (2) Replace no responsible sensors. (3) Check whether the sub-tank sensor relay cable (L/R) and sub-tank sensor cable (L/R) are connected securely and correctly and replace them. (4) Replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.2.18
Engine error 124x: Ink supply sensor error
Description
The ink supply sensor does not change even though the specified time is passed after driving the ink supply motor for the sub-tank x: 0= No. 1 head (Bk), 1= No. 2 head (Lm), ....5= No. 6 head (C). This error is checked at ink supply.
Defective module
(1) Ink supply sensor (2) Ink supply motor (3) Ink motor L/R cable (4) Ink motor relay cable (5) Ink motor sensor relay cable (6) Ink supply unit (7) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Enter to the maintenance mode using the cancel-shift powering on described in 5.10 Special Power-On Procedure. Enter to the sub-tank sensor ink supply x (x= 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) from the monitor menu. When there is a response at the time that the reflection plate turns white and black by moving the gear manually, the sensor work correctly. (2) Enter to the maintenance mode using the cancel-shift powering on described in 5.10 Special Power-On Procedure. Enter to the ink supply motor x from the actuator menu and preset it NORMAL to drive the motor. When the sub-tank is already in the full state, this is not checked. Therefore, ink should be discharged. Stop the motor immediately after checking the motor drive. Note that always do not charge too much ink to the sub-tank. Note that ink may be dropped from the head when the internal pressure of the sub-tank is extremely high. (3) Replace the corresponded motor, sensor, or cable when the ink supply sensor does not word correctly. (4) Replace the ink supply unit. (5) Replace the IPB1 board.
5-29
5.5.2.19
Engine error 125x: Sub-tank supply error
Description
x: 0= No. 1 head (Bk), 1= No. 2 head (Lm)....,5= No. 6 head (Lc). The sub-tank sensor does not turn to less than half even though the ink is consumed. This error is checked at ink supply.
Defective module
(1) Sub tank sensor: Half, Full (2) Sub-tank sensor relay cable (L/R), Sub-tank sensor cable (L/R) (3) IPB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) When the sub-tank is in full state, enter to the maintenance mode using the cancel-shift powering on described in 5.9 Special Power-On Procedure. Enter to the pump solenoid 1.2 from the actuator menu and cut the outside air by turning it OFF. Enter to the pump motor and discharge the ink of the sub-tank by driving the pump motor forward. Check whether the ink supply motor drives by turning the power on again when the ink is little. If the motor is not driven, replace the corresponded cable, ink supply motor unit. (2) Check whether the sensor plate of the sub-tank sensor works correctly. Check whether no foreign material that is blocking the sensor action is not caught in the cantilever. (3) Enter to the maintenance mode using the cancel-shift powering on described in 5.10 Special Power-On Procedure. Enter to the sub-tank sensor ink supply x (s= 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) from the monitor menu. Check whether there is a response of the sensor for display of black/white part by rotating the corresponded gear manually. If there is not response, replace the sensor. (4) Replace the ink supply sensor cable. (5) Replace the IPB1 board.
5-30
5.5.2.20
Engine error 126x: FFC cable connection error
Description
The FFC cables connected to the CN9, CN10, CN11, AND CN12 are defecting. (x: 0= CN9, 1= CN10, 2= CN11, 3= CN12) Four FFC (carridge cables) to the carridge are disconnected. When either side of four FFC is floated, the floating sensor lines assigned to both sides are opened and the error is generated. This error is checked during print.
Defective module
(1) Carriage cable (2) IPB1 board (3) ICB1 board
Measure to be taken
(1) Insert the carriage cable again. (ICB1 side and IPB1 side) (2) Check whether there is no damage on the carriage cable. (3) If the error still persists, replace the ICB1 board. (4) If the error still persists, replace the IPB1 board.
5.5.2.21
Engine error 1700x: Servo error
Description
An error occurs in the servo task. The X motor or Y motor move the carriage, but the input from the linear encorder does not change. Or no interrupt occurs from the PWM gate array. This error is checked at operation of the X motor or Y motor.
Defective module
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) X motor Y motor DC motor cable ASSY Motor encorder cable ASSY IPB1 board Grit roller gears Carriage gears Linear scale (T-fence) Linear encorder ICB1 board CARRIAGE CABLE (CN10)
5-31
Measure to be taken
(1) Check whether there is no jam. (2) Check whether CN14 and CN17 on the IPB1 board are connected correctly. (3) Check whether the carriage cable (FFC to be connected to CN10) is connected to the IPB1 and the ICB1 boards correctly. (4) Check whether the linear encorder on the ICB1 board is attached correctly. (5) Check whether there is no scratch or no stain on the linear scale. (6) Check whether the grit roller gears work correctly. (7) Check whether the carriage gears work correctly. (8) Replace the IPB1 board. (9) Replace the X motor or Y motor.
5-32
5.5.3
System errors
An unrecoverable system exception interrupt occurs in the engine.
F_es : nnnn POWER OFF/ON nnnn: Error code
The error codes are listed below.

Error description Operation code exception Slot illegal exception Address exception DMA error NMI occurrence (WatchDog error) Error state display F_es : 0001 F_es : 0002 F_es : 0003 F_es : 0004 F_es : 0005
Measure to be taken
Ask the user about the situation of error occurrence, replace the WEC board or engine F/W.
5-33
5.6
Engine F/W composition and Version Up
5.6.1
Engine F/W Composition

The engine F/W includes two types of programs: boot and engine control programs The engine F/W includes two types of programs: boot and engine control programs Engine control program: Controls the engine components and carries out printing and error processing. Combination between engine firmware IC cards for maintenance service and engine boards are shown in the following table. (See table.)
IP-6600 Boot program System program 1-card One IC card which includes boot and system program. Yes (work) Ver.1.10 or later Ver.1.02 or later
IC-Card
IPBl
NOTE
Downgrading of engine F/W from V2.** to V1.** is not allowed.
5-34
5.6.2 (1)
Engine F/W Version UP Boot program version up

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Turn the power off. Remove the masking plate on the front cover. For PCB-ASSY-IPB1 board, set bit1 of SW10 to ON and bit2 to OFF. Install the boot program IC card in the IC card socket on the IPB1 board. Turn the power on. When LED 1 and 3 light on the IPB1 board, writing ends. Turn the power off.(Push POWER switch on the operation panel for approximately 5 seconds and release it.) (8) For PCB-ASSY-IPB1 board, set bit1 of SW10 to OFF and bit2 to ON. (9) Reinstall the masking plate on the front cover. The errors that may be displayed during boot program version up are listed below.
Error description Display method - General illegal instruction: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 1 lights on the IPB1 board. - Slot illegal instruction: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 3 lights on the IPB1 board. CPU exception occurs during program writing. - CPU address error: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LEDs 1 and 3 light on the IPB1 board. - DMAC address error: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LEDs 5 lights on the IPB1 board. - MNI: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LEDs 1 and 5 light on the IPB1 board. Install another boot program IC card. If the program does not work, replace the IPB1 board. Measure
(2)
Engine control program version up

(1) Turn the power off. (2) Remove the masking plate on the front cover. (3) For PCB-ASS-IPB1 board, set bit 1 of SW10 to ON and bit 2 to OFF. (Normally, this is the default, so this step can be omitted.) (4) Install the boot program IC card in the IC card socket on the IPB1 board. (5) Turn the power on. (6) When the engine control program is written, the following is displayed. Operation panel LCD display: "Erase.." "Copy.." "Copy End" (Writing end) IPB1 board LED display: All LEDs offLEDs 1, 3, 5, 6, 8 AND 10 light. (delete)Only LED 4 lights. (Writing end) (7) Turn the power off. (8) Reinstall the masking plate on the front cover.
5-35
The errors that may be displayed during engine control program version up are listed below.
Error description An invalid IC card is installed.
Display method LCD: Illegal IC Card LEDs 1, 3, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 : off - General illegal instruction: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 1 lights on the IPB1 board. - Slot illegal instruction: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 3 lights on the IPB1 board.
Measure Install a correct engine control program IC card.
Install another engine control program IC card. If the program does not work, replace the IPB1 board.
CPU exception occurs during program writing.
- CPU address error: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 1 and 3 light on the IPB1 board. - DMAC address error: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 5 lights on the IPB1 board. - MNI: LEDs 8, 10, 12, and 14 flash and LED 1 and 5 light on the IPB1 board.
5-36
5.7
ASIC Program Composition and Version Up
5.7.1
ASIC Program Composition

The CPU writes programs stored into the flash memory to ATG, RSM, PTC, and PDD.
Flash memory
CPU
ATG
RSM
PTC
PDD
IPB1 board
ICB1 board
5.7.2
ASIC Program Version Up

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Turn the power off. Remove the masking plate on the front cover. For PCB-ASSY-IPB1, set bit 1 of SW10 to ON and bit 2 to OFF. Install the CFG card* in the IC card socket on the IPB1 board. Turn the power ON. When COPY 1 to 4 and on the operation panel and COPY END is displayed, writing ends. (7) Turn the power OFF. (8) For IPB1 board, set the bit 1 of SW10 to OFF and bit 2 to ON. (9) Reinstall the masking plate on the front cover. * Combination between IPB1 board version and CFG card
IPB1 board Version 00 (U00080931300) Version 01 (U00080931301)
CFG card CFG card (IPB1-00) (U000847394**) CFG card (IPB1-01) (U000847405**)
5-37
5.8
Upgrading Heater F/W
5.8.1
Heater F/W Composition

Firmware for controlling the heater unit is contained in the heater operation panel (HCP board) of this printer. This firmware can be updated from the IC card inserted in the IPB1 board.
Heater operation panel (HCP board)
IPB1
CPU
Flash memory
IC card I
5.8.2
How to Upgrade Heater F/W

(1) Remove the front cover window. (2) Upgrade the heater F/W according to the procedure in 3.1.2 System Menu, (18) Heater F/W version UP. (3) Turn off the power. (4) Remove the IC card. (5) Mount the front cover window. (6) Turn on the power. NOTE 1) Association with the engine F/W The function of uploading the heater F/W from the IC card is available for the engine F/W V1.5x and later versions and heater F/W V2.1 and later versions. To use this uploading function with an older engine F/W version, the engine F/W should be upgraded before upgrading the heater F/W. NOTE 2) Unsuccessful uploading If the write of heater F/W terminates unsuccessfully due to an unexpected event like power OFF during uploading, restart by overwrite is not possible. Uploading takes 140 to 150 seconds (the time * on the operation panel is blinking). Do not turn off the power, pull out the IC card, or any other thing to cause the failure of write operation during uploading. IC card used for upgrading heater F/W
Name Heater F/W (64) card U code U000898762
5-38
5.9
Setting During Engine Board (IPB1) Replacement

(1) If the NVRAM is not defective (If only the engine board is defective) Operation If the NVRAM on the current engine board can be installed on a new engine board, do as follow: (1) Remove the NVRAM on the current engine board and install it on a new engine board, and replace the board with the new one. Rewrite the engine F/W if necessary.
NOTE
Downgrading of engine F/W from V2.** to V1.** is not allowed.
(2) Start the printer. (3) Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode: SAVE SETTING: Save the contents of the NVRAM in the factory setting area of the flash memory. SAVE NVRAM: Save the contents of the NVRAM in the backup area of the flash memory.
See 3.5 System Information Management for a flow and management of system information of the NVRAM and flash memory by the print engine.
Procedure
Start
Install a NVRAM into a new engine board.
Turn the printer on.
Do as follows on the operation panel in SYSTEM menu of the engine maintenance mode: SAVE SETTING SAVE NVRAM
End
5-39
(2)
If the NVRAM fails and is replaced (Only the NVRAM is defective) Operation If a new NVRAM is installed on the current engine board, do as follows: (1) Install the new NVRAM on the current engine board. Rewrite engine F/W if necessary.
(2) Skip the POC and start the printer. Press the key and the power switch on the operation panel at the same time to skip the POC and start the printer. The language on the operation panel is shown in English because the printer turns on in NVRAM error with the uninitialized NVRAM.
(3) Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode: NVRAM INIT: Initialize the NVRAM. RESTORE NVRAM: Restore the contents of the backup area of the flash memory to the NVRAM.
(4) Turn the power OFF and ON again to restart.
Procedure
Start
Install a new NVRAM to the current engine board.
Turn the power On by pressing the key and the Power ON key. (Skip the POC and start the printer.)
Do as follow on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode:
NVRAM INIT RESTORE NVRAM
Turn the power OFF, and then turn the power ON again.
End
5-40
(3)
If both the NVRAM and engine board are replaced (both are defective) When both the NVRAM and engine board are replaced simultaneously, mechanical correction value parameters, running distance, and so on are lost. Therefore, it must be avoided. Although it depends on the degree of defect, try to perform step 1 or 2 above and make use of the NVRAM data or the contents of the backup area of the flash memory. If the engine system data cannot be used, do as follows: Operation (1) Install a new engine board. Rewrite engine F/W if necessary
(2) Skip the POC and start the printer. Press the key and the power switch on the operation panel at the same time to skip printer. The language on the operation panel is shown in English because the printer turns on in NVRAM error with the uninitialized NVRAM.
(3) Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the maintenance mode: NVRAM INIT: LANGUAGE: Initialize the NVRAM. Select Japanese for messages displayed on the LCD (in Japan).
(4) Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the maintenance mode: SYSTEM DATE SYSTEM TIME SERIAL NO. : Set a date (year, month, day) . : Set a time (hour, minute, second). : Set a serial number of the printer.
(5) Turn the power OFF and ON again with error recovery skip to restart. Press the key and the key and the power switch on the operation panel at the same time to skip the error recovery and start the printer.
(6) Do as follows on the operation panel from the MEC.ADJ menu in the maintenance mode: EDGE SENSOR ADJ: Register the platens maximum value read by the edge sensor to the NVRAM automatically.
(7) Turn the power OFF and ON again to restart. (8) Turn the power OFF and ON again to restart. <If a record remains> If a record of the mechanical adjustment parameters for the print engine remains, input correction values for mechanical and head adjustment with no adjustment.
<If a record does not remain> Do mechanical adjustment, and then input correction values.
5-41
<Correction values related to mechanical adjustment and head adjustment> Cap Position Correction: See 8.9 Cap Position Correction Wiping Position Correction: See 8.7 Wiping Position Correction Head Drive Voltage Setting: See 8.14 Head Drive Voltage Setting Head Position Correction: See 8.17 Head Position Correction Bi-direction Print Position Correction: See 8.18 Bi-direction Print Position Correction Paper Feed Amount Correction: See 8.20 Paper Feed Amount Correction Side Margin Position Correction: See 8.22 Side Margin Position Correction Top Margin Position Correction: See 8.23 Top Margin Position Correction Bottom Margin Position Correction: See 8.23 Bottom Margin Position Correction
(9) Do as follows on the operation panel from the H.MNTE menu in the maintenance mode: AUTO CLEANING INK CHARGE MODE : Set to ON. : Set to FINISHED.
(10) Do as folloes on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the maintenance mode: SAVE SETTING: the flash memory. SAVE NVRAM: memory. Save contents of the NVRAM to the factory setting area of Save contents of the NVRAM to the backup area of the flash
(11) Turn the power OFF, and then turn the power ON to restart the printer.
Procedure
Start
Install a new engine board
Turn the power ON by pressing the key and the Power ON key. (Skip the POC and start the printer.)
Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode: NVRAM INIT LANGUAGE: Select Japanese (in Japan).
5-42
Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode: SYSTEM DATE : Set a date SYSTEM TIME : Set a time SERIAL NO. : Set a serial number.
Turn the power OFF, and then turn the power by pressing the key, key, and Power ON key. (Skip the error recovery and start the printer.)
Do as follows on the operation panel from the MADJUST menu in the engine maintenance mode: EDGE SENS ADJ
Input correction values for the mechanical adjustment and head adjustment to the printer. If a record remains in the printer, only input parameters. If a record does not remain in the printer, adjust again.
Do as follows on the operation panel from the H. MAINT menu in the engine maintenance mode: AUTO CLEANING : Set to ON. INK CHARGE MODE : Set to FINISHED.
Do as follows on the operation panel from the SYSTEM menu in the engine maintenance mode: SAVE SETTING SAVE NVRAM
End
5-43
5.10
Special Power-On Procedure

The printer starts according to the normal sequence by turning ON the power switch on the operation panel. The following power-on sequence can be used for troubleshooting or special operation.
(1)
Power On Skip the POC of the engine. The printer can be started by the following procedure without performing the engine POC. Press the key and the power switch on the operation panel at the same time. It is useful to change menu setting when a POC error occurs. Keep pressing the key until INITIALIZING is displayed on the operation panel.
(2)
, Power On Skip the error recovery of the engine. The printer can be started by the following procedure without performing the error recovery of the engine. (1) Press the key, the panel at the same time. key and the power switch on the operation
(1) The printer starts without performing the error recovery and the password input display appears. (When an error engine error exists, the engine error message is displayed. However, go step 3.) (1) Put a password (Press the , , and keys).Top menu of the engine maintenance mode appears. There is a case that the Err message is displayed continuously without entering the engine maintenance mode. In that case, go forward with any keys. Operations after skipping the error recovery differ from the operations for normal starting by pressing the power switch in the following points: (1) (2) The printer works in the engine maintenance mode. The printer requires no recovery operation for errors (i.e. no paper). Panel operation is available. However, close the rear cover at rear cover open error. The printer leaves the menu without performing the adjust pattern print. The printer leaves the menu without performing the cleaning.
(3) (4)
Skipping the error recovery of the engine are useful for the following cases: (1) Ink draining without paper setting Ink drawing can be performed without paper setting at reinstallation of the printer. At normal starting of the printer, the operation panel cannot be operated without paper setting. Recovery of the damaged NVRAM When the NVRAM is damaged and an engine error occurs during operation, the damaged NVRAM can be recovered in the engine maintenance mode on the operation panel.
(2)
5-44
5.11
Countermeasures for No Error Message

(1) When no error message appears on the operation panel. Run the Booting program to display Booting on the operation panel. If Booting does not appear on the operation panel, do the followings: Check whether the operation panel works correctly. Write Boot program. Replace the IPB1 board. Write ASIC program. (2) When the printer displays Booting on the operation panel, but freezes action. The Boot program performs H/W POC after displaying Booting on the operation panel, and then copies the SYSTEM program to the SRAM. If the printer freezes action after displaying Booting on the operation panel, do the followings: Rewrite the SYSTEM program. Start the printer after removing the WIM1 board. If the problem is fixed, replace the WIM1 board. Write ASIC program.
Table 5-1 Booting Action List
PROGRAM
LED (1, 3, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14) all ON
LED (2, 4, 7, 9, 11, 13) LED2, 4 ON
DC power ON/0FF +5 V ON
F/W processing
Operation panel display (SCSI)
Operation panel display (at POCerror)
BOOT program +LED7 ON +12 V
Start Boot program on the flash memory. HW check in POC (flash, internal RAM, SDRAM) Copy system program on SRAM and jump. HW check in POC (power supply, NVRAM, CPGA, etc.) Power supply check in POC INITIALIZING WAIT A MOMENT Booting Booting
SYSTEM program
all OFF
+24 V ON +36 V ON +36 V OFF +24 V ON +24V ON +36V ON
E xxxx (Stop here)
Start opening the cap. +LED9, LED1: Lit. 11, 13 ON LED14: Faint lit.
5-45
5.12
System Information Setting Operation After Head Replacement

Perform the following operations after replacing the head to store system information. (1) Perform the followings in system menu of engine maintenance mode on the operation panel. SAVE SETTING: Store NVRAM contents to the initial value setting area of the flash memory. SAVE NVRAM: Store NVRAM contents to the backup area of the flash memory.
Procedure
Start
Do as follows on the operation panel in SYSTEM menu of the engine maintenance mode : SAVE SETTING SAVE NVRAM
End
5-46
5.13
Heater Errors
Heater errors show an abnormality is occurred in the heater block. Ask the customer to restart the printer again first. If an error cannot be removed, ask the customer to contact our service centers. Get error generation time, error frequency, operation right before error, and operation temperature information from the customer. Take the follow measures when an engine error is occurred. (1) (2) When the defective part is defined by the error, replace the specified module. When multiple defective parts are defined by the error, define the single defective part. Even when the heater error is occurred, the printer can be operated .
Error contents HCP board (heater panel) abnormality Connection abnormality between HCP board and RLY board Detected temperature abnormality of the front heater temperature detector thermistor (-10 or less, 70 or more) Detected temperature abnormality of the rear heater temperature detector thermistor (-10 or less, 70 or more) Detected temperature abnormality of the print heater temperature detector thermistor (-10 or less, 70 or more) The temperature of the front heater does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes passed The temperature of the front heater does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes rear heater passed The temperature of the front heater does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes print heater passed An error has occurred on the operation panel switch test in DIAG An error has occurred on the AC relay test in DIAG H01-xx System error H02 Relay board error H03F Heater temperature error H04R Heater temperature error H05P Heater temperature error H06F Heater time out error H07R Heater time out error H08P Heater time out error H09 Operation panel switch error H10 Zero cross erro Error state display (Upper: LCD 1, Lower: LCD 2)
5-47
5.13.1 Heater error H01: System error Description

This shows operational abnormality of HCP board. This shows an error has occurred at hardware test of HCP board such as write/read test to the built-in memory, check sum test of the built-in flash memory, or check sum test of the serial EEPROM.
Defective module
(1) HCP board
Measures to be taken
(1) Replace HCP board.
5.13.2 Heater error H02: Relay board error Description

This shows HCP board and RLY board are not connected together.
Defective module
(1) HCP board (2) RLY board
(1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to RLY board with RLY-B-CTL cable ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace RLY-B-CYL cable ASSY.
5.13.3 Heater error H03: F heater temperature error. Description

Temperature read by F heater thermistor is abnormal. (-10 C or less, 70 C or more)
Defective module
(1) HCP board (2) Front paper guide (in which the front heater ASSY 64 is attacked)
(1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to F thermistor with THRM cable ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace the front paper guide.
5-48
5.13.4 Heater error H04: R heater temperature error Description

This shows temperature read from R heater thermistor is abnormal. (-10 C or less, 70 C or more)
Defective module
(1) HCP board (2) Rear paper guide (in which the rear heater ASSY (64) is attacked)
(1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to R thermistor with THRM cable ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace the rear paper guide.
5.13.5 Heater error H05: P heater temperature error Description

This shows temperature read from P heater thermistor is abnormal. (-10 C or less, 70 C or more)
Defective module
(1) HCP board (2) Platen (in which the platen heater ASSY (64) is attacked)
(1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to P heater thermistor with THRM cable ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace the platen.
5.13.6 Heater error H06: F heater time out error Description

This shows the front heater temperature does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes passed.
Defective module
(1) HCP board (2) Heater drive block ASSY (The tray in which a breaker, RLY board, AC relay, and voltage alternation switch ASSY are mounted.) (3) Front paper guide (in which the front heater ASSY (64) is attacked.) (4) F1 fuse on RLY board
5-49
Measures 1 to be taken
When "+" is not displayed to "F" on the LCD of the heater panel (the electrical current cannot be flown) even the preset temperature for "F" on the LCD of the heater panel is 2 C or more higher than the actual temperature. (1) Replace HCP board.
When the display temperature of the heater panel does not raise even "+" is displayed to "F" on the LCD of the heater and F heater guide becomes hot. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to F thermistor with THRM cable ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace the front paper guide.
When F paper guide does not become hot and panel display temperature does not raise even "+" is displayed to "F" on the LCD of the heater panel. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to RLY board with RLY-B-CTL cable ASSY. (2) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to F heater with the voltage alternation switch ASSY. (3) Replace HCP board. (4) Verify that F2 fuse (5ST10 made by BELFUSE) on RLY board is not broken. If that is broken, Replace that. When the fuse is broken, there is a possibility of malfunction on F heater (over current or short circuit). Verify that resistance between pins is matched to the values listed in the table below after removing CN4 on RLY board.
CN4 1 pin 1 pin 2 pin 2 pin CN4 3 pin 4 pin 3 pin 4 pin at 120 V setting 1 M or more 55 to 75 55 to 75 1 M or more at 240 V setting 220 to 30 1 Mor more 1 Mor more 1 Mor more
If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY. If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the F paper guide. (5) Replace the heater drive block ASSY. (6) Replace the front paper guide.
When time out error due to late temperature raise is occurred, even though "F" is displayed to "F" on the LCD of the heater panel and the F paper guide becomes hot. (1) Verify that the voltage alternation switch located on the back of the heater drive ASSY is preset to the AC voltage used.
5-50
AC voltage 100V to 120V 220V to 240V
Switch setting 120 240
(2) Verify that resistance between pins is matched to the values listed in the table in <Measure 3 to be taken> after removing CN4 on RLY board. If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY. If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the F paper guide.
5.13.7 Heater error H07: 7 R heater time out error Description

This shows the rear heater temperature does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes passed.
Defective module
(1) HCP board (2) Heater drive block ASSY (The tray in which a breaker, RLY board, AC relay, and voltage alternation switch ASSY are mounted.) (3) Rear paper guide (in which the rear heater ASSY (64) is attacked.) (4) F2 fuse on RLY board
When "+" is not displayed to "R" on the LCD of the heater panel (the electrical current cannot be flown) even the preset temperature for "R" on the LCD of the heater panel is 2 C or more higher than the actual temperature. (1) Replace HCP board.
When the display temperature of the heater panel does not raise even "+" is displayed to "R" on the LCD of the heater and R heater guide becomes hot. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to R thermistor with THRM cable ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board. (3) Replace the rear paper guide.
When the rear paper guide become hot and the display temperature on the panel does not raise even though "+" is displayed to "R" on the LCD of the heater panel. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to RLY board with RLY-B-CTL cable ASSY. (2) Verify that RLY board is connected correctly to R heater with the voltage alternation switch ASSY. (3) Replace HCP board. (4) Verify that F2 fuse (5ST10 made by BELFUSE) on RLY board is not broken. If that is broken, Replace that. When the fuse is broken, there is a possibility of malfunction on R heater (over current or short circuit). Verify that resistance between pins is matched to the values listed in the table below after removing CN5 on RLY board.
5-51
CN4 1 pin 1 pin 2 pin 2 pin
CN4 3 pin 4 pin 3 pin 4 pin
at 120 V setting 1 M or more 35 to 50 35 to 50 1 M or more
at 240 V setting 140 to 200 1 Mor more 1 Mor more 1 Mor more
If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY. If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the R paper guide. (5) Replace the heater drive block ASSY. (6) Replace the rear paper guide.
When time out error due to late temperature raise is occurred, even though "R" is displayed to "R" on the LCD of the heater panel and the F paper guide becomes hot. (1) Verify that the voltage alternation switch located on the back of the heater drive ASSY is preset to the AC voltage used.
AC voltage 100V to 120V 220V to 240V Switch setting 120 240
(2) Verify that resistance between pins is matched to the values listed in the table in <Measure 3 to be taken> after removing CN5 on RLY board. If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY. If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the R paper guide.
5.13.8 Heater error H08: P heater time out error Description

This shows the print heater temperature does not reach to the preset temperature even after 15 minutes passed.
Defective module
(1) HCP board (2) RLY board (3) Platen (in which the platen heater ASSY (64) is attacked.) (4) F3 fuse on RLY board
When "+" is not displayed to "P" on the LCD of the heater panel (the electrical current cannot be flown) even the preset temperature for "P" on the LCD of the heater panel is 2 C or more higher than the actual temperature. (1) Replace HCP board.
When the display temperature of the heater panel does not raise even "+" is displayed to "P" on the LCD of the heater and R heater guide becomes hot. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to P thermistor with THRM cable ASSY. (2) Replace HCP board.
5-52
(3) Replace the platen.
When the rear paper guide become hot and the display temperature on the panel does not raise even though "+" is displayed to "P" on the LCD of the heater panel. (1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to RLY board with RLY-B-CTL cable ASSY. (2) Verify that RLY board is connected correctly to P heater with the voltage alternation switch ASSY. (3) Replace HCP board. (4) Verify that F3 fuse (5ST10 made by BELFUSE) on RLY board is not broken. If that is broken, Replace that. When the fuse is broken, there is a possibility of malfunction on P heater (over current or short circuit). Verify that resistance between pins is matched to the values listed in the table below after removing CN6 on RLY board.
CN4 1 pin 1 pin 2 pin 2 pin CN4 3 pin 4 pin 3 pin 4 pin at 120 V setting 1 M or more 15 to 50 15 to 50 1 M or more at 240 V setting 60 to 80 1 Mor more 1 Mor more 1 Mor more
If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY. If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the platen. (5) Replace the heater drive block ASSY. (6) Replace the platen.
When time out error due to late temperature raise is occurred, even though "P" is displayed to "P" on the LCD of the heater panel and the platen becomes hot. (1) Verify that the voltage alternation switch located on the back of the heater drive ASSY is preset to the AC voltage used.
AC voltage 100V to 120V 220V to 240V Switch setting 120 240
(2) Verify that resistance between pins is matched to the values listed in the table in <Measure 3 to be taken> after removing CN6 on RLY board. If they are different from table values, replace the heater block ASSY. If replacing the heater block ASSY is cannot solve the problem, replace the R paper guide.
5-53
5.13.9 Heater error H09: Operation panel switch error Description

This error occurs if the specified switch is not pressed for 30 seconds or more when the diagnostics that verifies switch action is executed.
Defective module
(1) HCP board
(1) Though the switch is pressed, when it cannot be accepted, replace HCP board.
5.13.10 Heater error H10: Zero cross error Description

This error occurs when the diagnostics for the AC relay is executed. The HCP board verifies that RLY board generates the zero cross signal when the AC relay is set to ON/OFF.
Defective module
(1) HCP board (2) Heater drive block ASSY (The tray in which a breaker, RLY board, AC relay, and voltage alternation switch ASSY are mounted.) (3) RLY-CTL relay cable ASSY (4) RLY-B-CTL cable ASSY
(1) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to the relays on the heater block ASSY with RLY-CTL relay cable ASSY and RLY-CTL cable ASSY. (2) Verify that HCP board is connected correctly to RLY board with RLY-B-CTL cable ASSY. (3) Replace HCP board. (4) Replace RLY board
5-54
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 6
Troubleshooting (Dryer 64)
This section describes troubleshooting of dryer 64.
6.1
Error Indication
Errors are not indicated on dryer 64. Failed modules cannot therefore be identified based on the error number. Measures to take for abnormal operations of the dryer are that if some operation that does not satisfy the standard performance or function of the dryer is found, the failed modules are presumed according to the type of abnormality, and the modules are replaced from the most highly suspected one.
6-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.2
Error Types and Counteractions

When the dryer operates abnormally, the user is encouraged to restart the dryer. If the same error repeatedly occurs, then the user should contact the nearby service center. The maintenance personnel should obtain the time of occurrence, how often the error occurs, dryer settings (temperature, air flow) and ambient temperature at the time of error from the user. (NOTE) 200VAC/230VAC is applied at the left side of the screen inside the electric box. Do not touch the terminals to prevent electric shocks when checking electricity in the process of narrowing down the cause of error. Do not touch the heat sink of the power supply. AC is also applied to the heat sink.
6.2.1
Power supply
<Error> Power LED (orange) does not light by turning on the circuit breaker switch. <Failed modules> (1) Power supply unit (2) DRY board (3) Circuit breaker <Measures> (1) Turn on the circuit breaker switch and check that 2xxVAC is supplied to the terminal block of six terminals with a tester. If AC is not supplied, turn on the circuit breaker switch again, and check the harness connecting to the terminal block.
Measuring point
(2) Replace the circuit breaker switch. (3) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. If DC is not supplied, check the harness supplying AC to the power supply unit and the harness between the power supply unit and DRY board.
6-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 6 Troubleshooting (Dryer 64)
Checking point
(4) Replace the power supply unit.

(5) Replace the DRY board.
6.2.2
Fan
(1) All fans do not turn. <Error> Fans do not turn by turning on the power. <Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) Power supply unit (3) Power supply unit of VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (air flow control for the upper and lower fans) <Measures> (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN2) to nine upper fans. Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN3) to four lower fans.
Checking point
(3) Replace the DRY board. (4) Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (air flow control for the upper and lower fans).
6-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(2)
Upper fan(s) does not turn. <Error> Upper fan(s) does not turn by turning on the power (1 to 9 fans). <Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) FAN-ASSY (3) VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for upper fans) <Measures> (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN2) to nine upper fans.
Checking point
(3) Check connection of the harness to the fan(s) that does not turn. The source of failure, whether it is the drive unit or fan, can be identified by connecting the signal line of the normal fan to the fun which does not turn. Replace FAN-ASSY when the fan is the source of failure. (4) Voltage on TP5 (silk notation = PFAN1) varies from 14V to 23V when the air flow control volume for the upper fans is turned. If the output voltage is abnormal, replace the DRY board.
Measuring point
(5) Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for upper fans).
6-4
(3)
Lower fan(s) does not turn. <Error> Lower fan(s) does not turn by turning on the power (1 to 4 fans). <Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) FAN-ASSY (3) VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for lower fans) <Measures> (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN3) to four lower fans.
Checking point
(3) Check connection of the harness to the fan(s) that does not turn. The source of failure, whether it is the drive unit or fan, can be identified by connecting the signal line of the normal fan to the fun which does not turn. Replace FAN-ASSY when the fan is the source of failure. (4) Voltage on TP6 (silk notation = PFAN2) varies from 14V to 23V when the air flow control volume for the lower fans is turned. If the output voltage is abnormal, replace the DRY board.
Measuring point
(5) Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for lower fans).
6-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(4)
Air flow does not change by adjusting the air flow control volume switch. <Error> Air flow does not change by adjusting the air flow control volume switch. <Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for upper/lower fans) <Measures> (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the connectors of volume switches to the DRY board. The shape of the connector of three volume switches is the same. Check each connector is connected to a relevant connector: Temperature adjustment CN10 of DRY board Air flow adjustment for upper fans CN6 of DRY board Air flow adjustment for lower fans CN7 of DRY board
Checking point
(3) When the air flow control volume switch is turned, voltage on TP5 (silk notation = PFAN1) or TP6 (silk notation = PFAN2) varies from 14V to 23V. If output voltage is abnormal, replace the DRY board.
Measuring point for upper fans
Measuring point for lower fans
(4) Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY connecting to CN6 if air flow of the upper fans is abnormal. Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY connecting to CN7 if air flow of the lower fans is abnormal.
6-6
(5)
The EL box cooling fan does not turn. <Error> The EL box cooling fan does not turn. <Failed modules> (1) Cooling fan (for EL box) (2) DRY board <Measures> (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN17) to the EL box fan.
Checking point
(3) Replace the fan (for EL box). (4) Replace the DRY board.
6.2.3
Heater
(1) Warm air does not come out. <Error> Warm air does not come out (power LED lights; fans are turning; and temperature set indicator LED (green) does not light). <Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) SSR (3) Relay (4) Thermostat (5) Timer (6) Heater
6-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
<Measures> (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check that 24V is supplied to SSR control terminals (between terminals (3) and (4) aligned at the upper row) with a tester. If 24V is not supplied, check connection between CN9 of the DRY board and SSR. If connection is normal but 24V is not supplied, replace the DRY board.
Measuring point
(3) Check that 24V is supplied to relay control terminals (between terminals 5 and 6 aligned at the right row) with a tester. If 24V is not supplied, check connection of the harness between CN9 of the DRY board and the timer, thermostat, and relay. If connection is normal but 24V is not supplied, replace the DRY board.
Measuring point
(4) Turn off the circuit breaker switch and measure resistance between SSR terminal 2 and relay terminal 1. The normal resistance is 17.6 (1). If the measured value deviates from the normal value, check connection of the harness. If connection is normal, replace the heater.
Measuring point
6-8
(5) Failure of SSR can be considered if the SSR output is off (2XXV is present between SSR terminals 1 and 2) while the SSR control terminal is on (24V is present between control terminals). Replace SSR.
VAC measuring point
(6) Failure of the relay can be considered if the relay output is off (AC2XXV is present between relay terminals 1 and 4) while the relay control terminal is on (24V is present between control terminals). Replace the relay.
VAC measuring point
(7) Turn off the power and measure resistance between the thermostat terminals. Failure of the thermostat can be considered if the thermostat cools down but is off (open). In this case, replace the thermostat. (8) Turn off the timer and measure resistance between pin 1 (a red cable is connected) and pin 9 (a red cable is connected) of the timer socket. If it is open, failure of the timer can be considered. Replace the timer. (9) When error LED (TEMP UNDER ERROR) on the DRY board lights, check connection of THRM-CBL-ASSY. If the connection is normal, replace the DRY board. If the error still occurs, replace THRM-CBL-ASSY.
6-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(10) If error LED (PFAN1 POWER FAIL ERROR) on the DRY board lights, check connection of VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for upper fans). If the connection is normal, replace the DRY board. If the error still occurs, replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for upper fans).
(Note) Turn off the timer when checking operation. (2) Warm air does not come out (temperature set LED (green) lights). <Error> Warm air does not come out (power LED lights; fans are turning; and temperature set LED (green) lights). <Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) THRM-CBL-ASSY <Measures> (3) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (4) Check error LED (TEMP UNDER ERROR) on the DRY board. When the LED lights, check connection of THRM-CBL-ASSY.
6-10
(5) Check short-circuit between THRM-CBL-ASSY and the cabinet. If the naked part of the terminal of the thermistor at the end of THRM-CBL-ASSY contacts with the metal sheet of the cabinet, adjust the thermistor position using tweezers to make clearance between the terminal and the cabinet.
Adhesive for securing the thermistor Metal sheet of the cabinet
Plastic case Location to check
Thermistor
(6) Replace the DRY board. (7) Replace THRM-CBL-ASSY. (Note) Set the temperature to the highest possible value when checking the operation. (3) Warm air comes out but temperature set indicator LED (green) does not light. <Error> Warm air comes out but temperature set indicator LED (green) does not light. <Failed module> (1) DRY board <Measures> (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check the room temperature. If the room temperature is too low (below 20 C), the set temperature may not be reached. (3) Check that the dryer is not connected to 100VAC with a tester (measure at the terminal block of 6 terminals. (4) Replace the DRY board.
6-11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(4)
Temperature does not change by turning the temperature control volume switch. <Error> Temperature does not change by turning the temperature control volume switch. <Failed modules> (1) DRY board (2) VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for temperature setting) <Measures> (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check connection of the connectors of volume switches to the DRY board. The shape of the connector of three volume switches is the same. Check each connector is connected to a relevant connector: Temperature adjustment CN10 of DRY board Air flow adjustment for upper fans CN6 of DRY board Air flow adjustment for lower fans CN7 of DRY board
Measuring point
(3) Replace the DRY board. (4) Replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for temperature setting). (5) The heater temperature is abnormally high. <Error> The heater temperature is abnormally high. <Failed modules> (1) Thermostat (2) DRY board (3) Relay (4) SSR (5) THRM-CBL-ASSY[ (6) Power supply unit
6-12
<Measures> This error occurs only when two or more parts fail at the same time. When thermistor circuit fails to retain the set temperature, the thermostat system detects abnormally high temperatures and the relay shuts off the heater current. The error therefore occurs by multiple failures of the part to retain the set temperature and the part to shut off the heater current at abnormally high temperatures. (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) If the fan(s) does not turn, take measures for the failure of the fan. (3) Replace the suspected modules (two or more parts at the same time).
6.2.4
Timer
(1) The heater does not turn off. <Error> The heater does not turn off when the predetermined time on the timer is up. <Failed module> (1) Timer <Measures> (1) Check that 24VDC is supplied to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester (see 6.2.1 for the measuring point). (2) Check the harness connecting the DRY board and the timer, thermostat and relay. (3) Replace the timer. (Note) Check that the user follows the usage instructions in the operation manual.
6-13
6.3
6.3.1
Appendix
IP6600 Error Code - Replacement Association Table
Error code
E0001 E0002 E0004 E0008 E0010
(1/3)
Replacement 1
IPB1 board (U000809313 **) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) Engine F/W card (U000871503**) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) IC(NVRAM) (U00086991600)
Large Small category category
Diagnosis/error description
CPU internal RAM SRAM Flash ROM PIO NVRAM Failure of CPU
Error, possible cause and counteraction
Replacement 2
Replacement 3
Replacement 4
Replacement 5
Replacement 6
Replacement 7
Replacement 8
Replacement 9
Remarks
Failure of CPU, SRAM or BTC (FPGA) Sum check error in program area stored in flash ROM. Re-install the engine F/W. If this does not work, flash ROM or surrounding circuits may have malfunctioned. Replace the IPB1 board. Failure of the PIO device. Read/write check error in specific area, or memory sum check error. (Normally processed as engine error 11Ax.) For simultaneous occurrence of more than one error, including this error, take counteractions for other errors first, and when these errors are wiped out, restart the printer. Read/write error on the FPGA (ATG and RSM) register of the IPB1 board. Failure of the FPGA device or surrounding circuits. Replace the IPB1 board. Read/write error on the FPGA (PTC and PDD) register of the ICB1 board. Failure of the FPGA device or surrounding circuits, or failure of interface circuits between boards. Before replacing parts, pull out then insert carriage cables again, and if this does not restore the printer, replace parts. Unsuccessful load of program from the flash ROM on the IPB1 board to FPGA on the IPB1 board, or program sum check error. Failure of the flash ROM, FPGA device, or surrounding circuits. Replace the IPB1 board. Unsuccessful load of program from flash ROM on the IPB1 board to FPGA on the ICB1 board, or program sum check error. Failure of the flash ROM or FPGA device, bad connection of carriage cables, failure of interface circuits between boards. Before replacing parts, pull out then insert carriage cables again, and if this does not restore the printer, replace necessary parts. Failure of DRAM or surrounding circuits.
IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
E0020 E0040
FPGA(IPB) FPGA(ICB)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **) ICB1 board (U000810887**) Carriage cable 64 (for maintenance) (U00089234800) IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
POC error (bit error)
E0080 E0100
ASIC CONFIG(IPB) ASIC CONFIG(ICB)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **) ICB1 board (U000810887**) Carriage cable 100 (for maintenance) (U00091331800) IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
E0200 E0400
DRAM SCSI register
E0800
Power supply (+35, +24, +12V)
Service call error
Read/write error on SCSI protocol controller of the WIM1 board. Failure of the WIM1 board or interface circuits between boards, or bad connection of the IPB1 and WIM1 boards. Pull out the boards and insert them again. If this does not restore the printer, replace the bad board(s). Fuse (IPB) Power is not supplied to +36V, +24V, and/or +12VDC. (U00036367700) Check output voltages, interlock switch state, connection of power supply unit cables, and fuse of the IPB1 board. Or the over-current protection circuit may have been activated. Check short-circuit of the harness and board, and turn off and on the insulator switch at the back of the printer.
IPB1 board (U000809313 **) WIM1 board (U00026299100)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) Power supply unit PSU-XW1X (U00078520400) ICB1 board (U000810887**) Carriage cable 100 (for maintenance) (U00091331800) VDD2 board (U0002630131*) Micro switch (U00057056500) Interlock cable 64 (U00079085200) This error is not caused by failure of micro switch (FW). Short-circuit is suspected for the parts in replacements 4, 5, and 6. For bad carriage cables, the most suspect cable is the 4th, 3rd and 2nd from the top in this order.
E1000 1110 1111 112x 1140 1150 1160 1170
SCSI board GA_ATG block clear error GA_ATG DMA error Vacuum fan malfunction Flash memory error Home position detection error Wiping error Ambient temperature sensor error Capping error VDD2 voltage error
Engine error
1180 119x
The WIM1 board is not connected properly. Improper connection of the IPB1 and WIM1 boards is the most common cause of this error. Pull out then insert the boards, and if this does not restore the printer, replace the bad board(s). ATG (FPGA) band memory block is not erased in specific time (time-out error). Failure of the ATG device or surrounding circuits. Replace the board. Drawing data transfer error. Check connection between the unit and host computer. As malfunction, bad connection of the WIN1 board or failure of interface circuits between boards can be considered. Vacuum fan does not turn, or turning cannot be detected. Check connection of the harness before replacing parts. Write error while NVRAM data was being written in flash ROM (write time-out, or erase time-out). Failure of flash ROM. Replace the IPB1 board. Home position cannot be detected. Failure of the sensor or sensor circuit of the IPB1 board. Wiping motor does not revolve, or revolution cannot be detected. Check connection of the harness before replacing parts. Abnormal temperature was detected in ambient temperature thermistor. Check connection of the harness before replacing parts. Over-current of capping motor was detected. Apply grease on the capping unit gears and check over-current again before replacing parts. Head driving voltage is not output correctly. Check connection of the VDD2 board, and pull out then insert carriage cables again before replacing parts.
WIM1 board (U00026299100) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) WIM1 board (U00026299100) Suction fan assy. (U00046003400) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) Photo sensor assy. (U00084544700) Motor (wiper) assy. (U00036684000) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) ICB1 board (U000810887**)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **) IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
SCSI cable assy. (LVD-6M) (U00027457700)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **) Switch (wiper) assy. (U00036698500) Pump assy. (U00085987100) VDD2 board (U0002630131*)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **) Motor (cap) assy. (U00035952600) Carriage cable 100 (for maintenance) (U00091331800)
Fuse (IPB) (U00036367700)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
The fuse to replace is located at F1 on the IPB1 board. For bad carriage cables, the 4th, 3rd and 2nd from the top is the order of most suspect cause of error.
11Ax 11B0 11C0
NVRAM error Update error Out-of-place cap
NVRAM error. The error may disappear by restarting the printer. If the error still continues to occur, check connection of the IPB1 board to the IC socket. Online F/W update error. Check connection between the unit and host computer. As malfunction, bad connection of the WIN1 board or failure of interface circuits between boards can be considered. Difference between two devices monitoring carriage positions. Check connection of the linear encoder connector, pull out then insert carriage cables again, and clean the T fence before replacing parts. The head temperature does not decrease to specified level even when the cooling fan is operating. Check connection of the connector before replacing parts. Power off state of the printer has continued for more than a month (31 days). Turn on the power while pressing [SHIFT] and [CANCEL] at the same time. Clean the printer and replace necessary parts in maintenance mode.
IC(NVRAM)(U00086991600) WIM1 board (U00026299100) ICB1 board (U000810887**) ICB1 board (U000810887**)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) Linear encoder assy. (U00046006700) Cooling fan (U00084528000) Engine F/W card (U000871503 **) T fence 64 (U00086122100) Head (U00081350800) SCSI cable assy. (LVD-6M) (U00027457700) Carriage cable 64 (for maintenance) (U00091331800)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
For bad carriage cables, the most suspect cable is the 4th, 3rd and 2nd from the top in this order.
11D0 11E0
Malfunction of cooling fan Long-term storage error
6-15
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Large Small category category Error code
120x
(2/3)
Replacement 1
ICB1 board (U000810887**)
Abnormal head driver IC temperature
Error, possible cause and counteraction

Temperature of the head driving IC is abnormally high or low. Pull out then insert carriage cables again before replacing parts.
Replacement 2
Carriage cable 64 (for maintenance) (U00089234800)
Replacement 3
IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
Replacement 4
Replacement 5
Replacement 6
Replacement 7
Replacement 8
Replacement 9
Remarks
For bad carriage cables, the most suspect cable is the 3rd, 2nd and 4th from the top in this order.
121x
Abnormal head temperature
Temperature of the head is abnormally high or low. Pull out then insert the head and carriage cables before replacing parts.
Head cable 64 (for maintenance) (U00089679300)
ICB1 board (U000810887**)
Head (U00081350800)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
For bad carriage cables, the most suspect cable is the 3rd, 2nd and 4th from the top in this order. For bad carriage cables, the most suspect cable is the 3rd, 2nd and 4th from the top in this order.
1220
Edge sensor error
Edge sensor calibration error. Check connection of cables, and obstacles or dirt in calibration area (platen (no reflection tape)) from end of cap to paper before replacing parts.
Edge sensor assy. (U00046008000)
ICB1 board (U000810887**)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
Engine error
123x 124x
Sub tank sensor (full/half) error Ink supply sensor error Sub tank supply error
Service call error
Logical inconsistency of combined state of sub tank sensors. Check connection of the connector and movement of the detection lever of sensors before replacing parts. Ink supply motor does not revolve, or revolution cannot be detected. Check connection of the harness, short-circuit of terminals and wirings before replacing parts. Sub tank sensor does not go down under half no matter how much ink is consumed. Check connection of the connector and movement of the detection lever of sensors before replacing parts. Bad connection of carriage cables. Pull out then insert carriage cables again before replacing parts. Error occurs when the servo task reports error (e.g. over-current of motor), encoder signals usually changing by driving the X or Y motor do not change, or there is no interrupt from the PWM gate array. Increase in load to the motor due to paper jam, idling due to malfunction of the transmission system, or bad connection of connector may be the cause. Check the status before replacing parts.
Half sensor assy. (U00084545800) Motor assy. (SP pump) (U00084118400) Half sensor assy. (U00084545800) Carriage cable 100 (for maintenance) (U00091331800) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
Full sensor assy. (U00046985200) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) Full sensor assy. (U00046985200) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) ICB1 board (U000810887**) Feed motor assy. (U00051862400) IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
125x
IPB1 board (U000809313 **) ICB1 board (U000810887**) Y drive motor 64 assy. (U00085456100) Reduction belt (U00046001200) SUS belt 64 (U00086135500) Motor encoder cable assy. (64) (U00079088500) Synch belt (U00045985400) DC motor cable assy. (64) (U00079079500) Linear encoder assy. (U00046006700) T fence 64 (U00086122100) Carriage cable 64 (for maintenance) (U00089234800) DC motor cable assy. (64) (U00079079500) Carriage drive system Feed drive system
126x
Bad FFC connection
1700
Servo error
F_es:0001 Op code exception
System error
F_es:0002 Wrong slot exception F_es:0003 Address exception F_es:0004 DMA error F_es:0005 NMI occurrence (Watch Dog error)
Unrecoverable system exception interrupt was caused in the engine unit. Wait and Engine F/W card see the status while turning the power off and on. If this error frequently occurs, ask (U000871503 **) the user the status in which the error occurs, and replace the IPB1 board or engine F/W if necessary.
6-16

Large category Small category Error code
REPLACE INK. Ink cartridge
(3/3)
Possible cause and counteraction Replacement 1
INK2 board (U000780783**)
No ink
Replacement 2
Ink cartridge R cable 64 (U00079086300)
Replacement 3
Ink cartridge L cable 100 (U00079087400)
Replacement 4
IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
Remarks
Incomplete setting of cartridge, or dirty terminal of cartridge. If the cartridge is dirty, clean and set it again. If this does not restore the printer, replace necessary parts. Check connection of connectors before replacement.
SET INK. CHECK INK. SET INK BOTTLE.
Ink cartridge is not set Ink cartridge error Waste ink bottle is not set Paper jam was detected Incomplete setting of waste ink bottle notch, or failure of waste ink bottle detection switch. Paper jam detection error. Take counteractions according to the message. If error detection appears while paper jam does not occur, clean the paper sensor, check connection, and see if the error indication disappears. When the sensor malfunctions, replace the sensor. If the error message still appear, take counteractions as indicated in Engine error 1700. Error indicating paper skew. Incorrect setting of paper, dirty platen, dirty edge sensor or malfunction of sensor may be the cause. If sensor errors other than the above error continue to occur, replace the failed sensor or IPB1 board. Error generated as a result of the microcomputer in the HCP board carrying out memory read/write or check sum tests. Failure of IC on the HCP board or incorrect signal wiring may be the cause. Error is generated when it is recognized that the HCP and RLY boards are not connected with harness. Check connection of the harness between CN3 of heater panel and CN3 of RLY board before replacing parts. Abnormal temperature detected by the front heater temperature detecting thermistor (under -10C or over 70C). Check connection of the harness between CN4 of the heater panel and connector of the front heater thermistor before replacing parts. Abnormal temperature detected by the rear heater temperature detecting thermistor (under -10C or over 70C). Check connection of the harness between CN4 of the heater panel and connector of the rear heater thermistor before replacing parts. Abnormal temperature detected by the print heater temperature detecting thermistor (under -10C or over 70C). Check connection of the harness between CN4 of the heater panel and connector of the print heater thermistor before replacing parts. Front heater temperature does not reach the set value (after 15 min. from start of heating). Check the following before replacing parts: (1) Ambient temperature is within range of operating temperatures. (2) Supply voltage used and voltage changeover switch settings coincide. (3) CN4 of the RLY board and connector of the font heater are connected via harness. Heater panel (U00085906100) Heater panel (U00085906100) Heater panel (U00085906100) Heater panel (U00085906100) Heater panel (U00085906100) Heater panel (U00085906100) RLY board (U00078671200) Paper guide F (64) assy. (U00085907200) Paper guide F (64) assy. (U00085908300) Platen (64) assy. (U00085909400) Fuse (heater) (U00079512600) RLY board (U00078671200) Paper guide F (64) assy. Fuse to replace is located at F1 of the (U00085907200) RLY board. Micro switch 2 (U00046054100) Paper sensor assy. (U00085453700) IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
Operator call error
Waste ink
Paper jam Paper skew was detected Paper error Other System error Relay board error H01-xx H02 H03 Heater temperature error H04 H05 H06 Sensor errors Malfunction of HCP board (heater panel) Bad connection of HCP and RLY boards Abnormal front heater temperature Abnormal rear heater temperature Abnormal print heater temperature Rise of front heater temperature is too slow
Edge sensor assy. (U00046008000)
ICB1 board (U000810887**)
IPB1 board (U000809313 **)
H07 Heater time-out Heater error H08
Rise of rear heater temperature is too Rear heater temperature does not reach the set value (after 15 min. from start of heating). Check the following before replacing parts: slow (1) Ambient temperature is within range of operating temperatures. (2) Supply voltage used and voltage changeover switch settings coincide. (3) CN5 of the RLY board and connector of the rear heater are connected via harness. Rise of print heater temperature is too slow Print heater temperature does not reach the set value (after 15 min. from start of heating). Check the following before replacing parts: (1) Ambient temperature is within range of operating temperatures. (2) Supply voltage used and voltage changeover switch settings coincide. (3) CN6 of the RLY board and connector of the print heater are connected via harness. Error in DIAG heater control panel switch tests. Error in DIAG AC relay tests. Check the following before replacing parts: (1) Connection of CN2 of the heater panel and relay. (2) Connection of CN3 of the heater panel and CN3 of the RLY board. 5V power supply on the heater panel does not turn on, or failure of heater panel. Check connection of CN1 of the heater panel and CN1 of the power supply unit before replacing parts. Zero cross signals are not sent from the RLY board. Check the following before replacing parts: (1) Connection of CN2 of the heater panel and relay. (2) Connection of CN3 of the heater panel and CN3 of the RLY board. Connection to the IPB1 board cannot be recognized. Check connection of harness between CN5 of the heater operation panel and CN16 of the IPB1 board before replacing parts. 12V power supply does not turn on. Check connection of CN1 of the heater panel and CN1 of the power supply unit before replacing parts. CPU does not operate at all. Power does not turn on. Operation panel malfunctions. Check the power supply unit and related parts, and connection state of harness of the operation panel before replacing parts.
Heater panel (U00085906100)
Fuse (heater) (U00079512600)
RLY board (U00078671200)
Paper guide F (64) assy. Fuse to replace is located at F2 of the (U000S5908300) RLY board.
Heater panel (U00085906100)
Fuse (heater) (U00079512600)
RLY board (U00078671200)
Platen (64) assy. (U00085909400)
Fuse to replace is located at F3 of the RLY board.
Op panel switch error Zero cross error
H09 H10
Heater panel switch test error AC relay test error
Heater panel (U00085906100) Heater panel (U00085906100) Heater panel (U00085906100) Heater panel (U00085906100) Heater panel (U00085906100) Heater panel (U00085906100) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) RLY board (U00078671200) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) IPB1 board (U000809313 **) Operation panel SII (U00045843600) ENG-INF cable assy. (U0007882600) Power supply unit PSU-XW1X (U00078520400) Panel cable 64 (U00079081700) Power supply unit PSU-XWIX (U00078520400) RLY board (U00078671200)
Error code is not displayed. TURN ON HEATER POWER SIWTCH. Other INITIALIZING... POWER SAVE MODE
Heater panel error AC input detection error
Bad connection of HCP and IPB1 boards 12V power supply failure
Error code is not displayed. Other Other
6-17
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.2
Category
Power supply
Dryer unit 64 Failure Description - Replacement Association Table

Failure description Major cause
The failure occurs when 24VDC is not supplied to the DRY board. Failure of power supply Failure of DRY board Failure of circuit breaker Failure of DRY board
Counteraction
Check supply of 2XXV AC to terminal block of 6 terminals with a tester with the breaker switch set to ON. If 2XXV AC is not supplied, turn on the breaker switch again. Check connection of harness to the terminal block. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. If 24V DC is not supplied, check the harness for AC line to power supply unit and the harness between the power supply and DRY board. Replace the parts listed at the right side. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN2) to 9 fans. Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN3) to 4 fans. Replace the parts listed at the right side. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN2) to 9 fans. Replace the parts listed at the right side. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check connection of the harness to the connector of fans which do not turn. Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN2) to 9 fans. Replace the parts listed at the right side. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN3) to 4 fans. Replace the parts listed at the right side. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check connection of the harness to the connector of fans which do not turn. Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN3) to 4 fans. Replace the parts listed at the right side. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check connection of the connector of volume switch to the DRY board. The shape of the connector of three volume switches is the same. Check each connector is connected to a relevant connector: Temperature adjustment CN10 of DRY board Upper fan air flow adjustment CN6 of DRY board Lower fan air flow adjustment CN7 of DRY board Replace the parts listed at the right side. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check connection of the harness from the DRY board (CN17) to the EB cooling fan. Replace the parts listed at the right side. SSR is not ON in the state in which 2XXV AC is detected between SSR terminals 1 and 2 while the heater is ON. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check supply of 24V to SSR control terminals (between terminals 3 and 4 aligned at upper side) with a tester. If 24V is not supplied, check connection of CN9 of the DRY board and SSR. When error LED (TEMP UNDER ERROR) on the DRY board lights, check connection of THRM-CBL-ASSY. If error does not disappear, replace THRM-CBL ASSY or DRY board. Check the error LEDs on the DRY board. If PFAN1 POWER FAIL ERROR lights, check connection of VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for air flow adjustment of upper fans). If error does not disappear, replace VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (for air flow adjustment of upper fans) or DRY board. Replace the parts listed at the right side. Relay is not ON in the state in which 2XXV AC is detected between relay terminals 1 and 4 while the heater is ON. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check supply of 24V to relay control terminals (between terminals 5 and 6 aligned at right side) with a tester. If 24V is not supplied, check connection of the harness between CN13 of the DRY board and the timer, thermostat, and relay. Replace the parts listed at the right side. Measure resistance between SSR terminal 2 and relay terminal 1 with the breaker switch OFF. The value for normal resistance is 17.6 (1). If the measured value deviates from the normal value, check connection of the harness. Replace the parts listed at the right side. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check error LED (TEMP OVER ERROR) on the DRY board. If the LED lights, check connection of THRM-CBL-ASSY. Replace the parts listed at the right side.
Replacement 1
Power supply unit (U00086797100)
Replacement 2
DRY board (U000863425**)
Replacement 3
Circuit breaker (U00086794700)
Replacement 4
Replacement 5
Replacement 6
Remarks
Power LED may light even when DC24V is not output correctly. (Note 1) (Note 2)
Power LED (orange) does not light after power on.
Fan
All fans do not turn. (Power LED lights.)
DRY board (U000863425**) DRY board (U000863425**) Fan assy. (U00086952300) DRY board (U000863425**) Fan assy. (U00086952300) DRY board (U000863425**)
More than one fan in upper Failure of DRY board row does not turn. One of fans in upper row does not turn. Failure of fan
More than one fan in lower Failure of DRY board row does not turn. One of fans in lower row does not turn. Air flow does not change by turning the knob. Failure of fan
Failure of volume switch Failure of DRY board
VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (U00086832000) (For air flow adj. of upper/lower fans) Fan assy. Power supply unit VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (U00086952300) (U00086797100) (U00086832000) (For air flow adj. of upper fans) DRY board Power supply unit VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (U000863425**) (U00086797100) (U00086832000) (For air flow adj. of upper fans) Fan assy. Power supply unit VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (U00086952300) (U00086797100) (U00086832000) (For air flow adj. of lower fans) DRY board Power supply unit VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (U000863425**) (U00086797100) (U00086832000) (For air flow adj. of lower fans) VOLSW-CBL-ASSY Power supply unit VOLSW-CBL-ASSY (U00086832000) (U00086797100) (U00086832000) (For air flow adj. of upper/lower fans)
The source of failure, drive unit or fan, can be identified by connecting signals which are sent to the operating fan to the fun which does not operate. When the air flow adjusting volume for upper fans is turned, the TP5 (silk notation = PFAN1) voltage changes within 14 V to 23V. The source of failure, drive unit or fan, can be identified by connecting signals which are sent to the operating fan to the fun which does not operate. When the air flow adjusting volume for upper fans is turned, the TP5 (silk notation = PFAN1) voltage changes within 14 V to 23V. The source of failure, drive unit or fan, can be identified by connecting signals which are sent to the operating fan to the fun which does not operate. When the air flow adjusting volume for lower fans is turned, the TP6 (silk notation = PFAN2) voltage changes within 14 V to 23V. The source of failure, drive unit or fan, can be identified by connecting signals which are sent to the operating fan to the fun which does not operate. When the air flow adjusting volume for lower fans is turned, the TP6 (silk notation = PFAN2) voltage changes within 14 V to 23V. When the air flow adjusting volume for upper fans is turned, the TP5 (silk notation = PFAN1) voltage changes within 14 V to 23V. When the air flow adjusting volume for lower fans is turned, the TP6 (silk notation = PFAN2) voltage changes within 14 V to 23V.
Cooling fan in electric box does not turn. Heater Warm air does not come out. (Temperature set indicator LED (green) does not light; power LED lights; and fan is turning.)
Failure of EB cooling fan Failure of DRY board (1) SSR does not turn on. Failure of DRY board or SSR
FAN (EL-BOX) (U00086953400) DRY board (U000863425**)
DRY board (U000863425**) SSR (U00086476000)
Power supply unit (U00086797100) Power supply unit (U00086797100) VOLSW-CBL-ASSY THRM-CBL-ASSY (U00086332000) (U00086831800) (For air flow adj. of upper fans)
(Note 5) TEMP UNDER ERROR LED will light at ambient temperature under -10C, but this is not failure. (Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 4)
(2) Relay does not turn on.
DRY board (U000863425**)
Relay (U00086795800)
Thermostat (U00086846500)
Timer (U00086799300)
Turn off the timer switch during operation check. (Note 1) (Note 2)
(3) Heater error
FIN-HEATER (U00086927500) DRY board (U000863425**) THRM-CBL-ASSY (U00086831800) Power supply unit (U00086797100) Set the temperature at highest permissible level. (Note 4)
Warm air does not come out. (Temperature set indicator LED (green) lights; power LED lights; and fan is turning.) Warm air comes out but temperature set indicator LED (green) continues to extinguish. (Power LED lights; and fan is turning.) Temperature does not change by turning the knob. (Power LED lights; and fan is turning.)
Failure of thermistor/DRY board
Failure of thermistor/DRY board, or incorrect supply voltage
Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Replace the parts listed at the right side.
DRY board (U000863425**)
Check the room temperature. If it is too low, the set temperature may not be reached (it should be over 20C). Measure power supply with a tester to check that the printer is not connected to 100V AC (measure at the terminal block of 6 terminals). (Note 1) (Note 2) Power supply unit (U00086797100)
Failure of volume switch/ DRY board
Heater temperature is abnormally high. Timer Heater does not turn off after timer set time.
SSR, relay, DRY board, thermostat Failure of timer
Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check connector of the volume switch is correctly connected to the DRY board. The shape of the connector of three volume switches is the same. Check each connector is connected to a relevant connector. Temperature adjustment CN10 of DRY board Upper fan air flow adjustment CN6 of DRY board Lower fan air flow adjustment CN7 of DRY board Replace the parts listed at the right side. Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Follow the instructions for fans if the fans do not turn. Replace the parts listed at the right side.(Replace two or more parts at the same time) Check supply of 24V DC to test pin TP1 (silk notation = +24V) on the DRY board with a tester. Check the harness connecting timer, thermostat, relay and DRY board. Replace the parts listed at the right side.
VOLSW-CBL-ASSY DRY board (U00086832000) (U000863425**) (for setting temperature)
Thermostat (U00086846500) Timer (U00086799300)
DRY board (U000863425**) Power supply unit (U00086797100)
Relay (U00086795800)
SSR (U00086476000)
THRM-CBL-ASSY (U00086831800)
This failure occurs only when two or more parts fail at the same time. Since fail-safe design is used for the printer, failure of only one part does not result in this state. (Note 4)
(Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 4) (Note 5)
AC is applied at the left side of the screen in the electric box. Do not touch the terminal to prevent electric shock. AC is applied to the heat sink of the power supply. Do not touch the heat sink to prevent electric shock. The parts to replace are listed from the order of the highest possibility of failure. Binding bands and specified adhesive (high heat resistance silicon gasket 1209 Three Bond) are required for replacing THRM-CBL-ASSY. Binding bands are required for replacing the fan (EL-BOX).
6-18
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 7
Parts Replacement (Disassembly/Reassembly)
This section describes disassembly and reassembly procedures for replacing printer components.
7.1
7.1.1
Reading This Section

Disassembly/Reassembly Procedure The following rules must be obeyed for parts replacement (disassembly/reassembly) procedures.
NOTE
Observe the installed components before starting disassembly. This can
facilitate reassembly after parts replacement.
<Removal>: Indicates a disassembly procedure. Note that some detailed procedures are shown in illustrations. The numbers in parentheses show the number of screws or connectors to be removed.
<Installation>: Indicates a reassembly procedure. Only notes are described because components are installed in the reverse order of removal.
7-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.2
7.2.1
Names of Parts
Names of parts and layout The names of maintenance parts of this printer are shown in Table 7-1 to 7-14. Refer to the tables for disassembling and reassembling procedures. See Figures 7-1 and 7-2 for the covers and guides.
(2) (1) (3) (15) (24) (5) (3) (13) (1) (25) (2)
(4) (6)
(8) (20) (17) (10) (15)
(5) (12) (19) (16) (21)

(1) Y rail cover (2) Top cover (Left) (3) Top cover (Right) (4) Side cover (Left) (5) Side cover (Right) (6) Sub ink tank cover (Left) (7) Sub ink tank cover (Right) (8) Ink cassette cover (Left) (9) Ink cassette cover (Right) (10) Paper guide (Front) (11) Supply pump cover (Left) (12) Supply pump cover (Right) (13) Rear acrylic cover
(4) (18) (14) (22)
(7) (9) (23)
(14) Paper guide (Rear) (15) Front cover (Center) (16) Front cover (Right) (17) Front cover (Left) (18) Side cover 2 (Left) (19) Side cover 2 (Right) (20) Ink holder cover (Front left) (21) Ink holder cover (Front right) (22) Ink holder side cover (Left) (23) Ink holder side cover (Right) (24) Cap cover (Upper) (25) Wiper cover (Lower) (26) Cap cover (Lower) (27) Wipe cover (Lower)
Figure 7-1
Cover Names and Layout
7-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 7 Parts Replacement (Disassembly/Reassembly)
Dryer 64
Figure 7-2
Cover names and layout (Dryer 64)
7-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Cover
Table 7-1
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Maintenance part names (Cover)

Part code U00057056500 U00057057600 U00084544700 U00045843600 U00079081700 U00085512300 U00079085200 U00085906100 U00078882600 U00085907200 U00091247500 U00091248600 U00091249700 U00091250800 U00091251000 U00091253200 U00091252100 U00091254300 U00084245500 U00087258300 U00084745100 7.3.1.3 7.3.1.6 Refer to 7.3.1.1 7.3.1.2 7.3.1.4 7.3.1.5
Part name MICRO SWITCH MICRO SWITCH (F/W) PHOTO SENSOR ASSY PANEL ASSY SII PANEL CABLE 64 KNOB INTER LOCK CABLE 64 HEATER PANEL HEATER PANEL CABLE PAPER GUIDE (64) ASSY Y RAIL COVER SUBTANK COVER (L) SUBTANK COVER (R) REAR ACRYLIC COVER CAP COVER (UPPER) CAP COVER (LOWER) WIP COVER (UPPER) WIP COVER (LOWER) TOP COVER SIDE COVER CP64S LABEL
Foot assembly
Table 7-2
Number 1 2 3 4 CASTER MICRO SWITCH 2 WASTE INK TANK CABLE TUBE(WASTE)ASSY ASSY(64)
Maintenance parts names (Foot assembly)

Part name Part code U00043889500 U00046054100 U00079080600 U00093966600 Regular replacement part (once a year) Refer to
7-4
Y drive unit
Table 7-3
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Maintenance parts names (Y drive unit)

Part name Part code U00085456100 U00045985400 U00085535800 U00084544700 U00086122100 U00085483100 U00087361700 U00089453200 U00079079500 U00089234800 U00089236100 U00046070800 U00086149100 U00085150200 U00087236800 U00090289100 (7.3.2.7) (7.3.2.7) 7.3.2.7 7.3.2.9 Refer to 7.3.2.2 7.3.2.3 7.3.2.3 7.3.2.1 7.3.2.9 7.3.2.4 7.3.2.5 7.3.2.6
Y MOTOR 64 ASSY SYNCHRONOUS BELT DOUBLE PULLEY ASSY PHOTO SENSOR ASSY T FENCE 64 STEEL BELT 64 DRIVEN PULLEY 64 ASSY PRESSURE BRACKET UNIT 64 DC MOTOR CABLE ASSY (64) CARRIAGE CABLE 64 (FOR MAINTENANCE) SHEET (CARRIAGE CABLE 64) SCREW CAP PRESSURE SPRING 64C PRESSURE SPRING 64A PRESSURE ROLLER 64 CLIP (35)
7-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
X drive unit
Table 7-4
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Maintenance parts names (X drive unit)

Part name Part code U00085538200 U00085453700 U00085452600 U00085457200 U00079088500 U00085909400 U00085908300 U00085631500 U00087029800 7.3.3.1 Refer to 7.3.3.1 7.3.3.3 (Front) 7.3.3.4 (Rear) 7.3.3.2 7.3.3.1
SPEED REDUCTION BELT PAPER SENSOR ASSY VACUUM FAN ASSY PAPER FEED MOTOR ASSY MOTOR ENCODER CABLE ASSY (64) PLATEN (64) ASSY PAPER GUIDER (64) ASSY X PULLY MEDIA EDGE GUARD
Power unit
Table 7-5
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Maintenance parts names (Power unit)

Part code U00078520400 U000809313** U000262991** U0002630131* U00036367700 37200-0302 U00086991600 U00078671200 U00079512600 7.3.4.4 Refer to 7.3.4.2 7.3.4.3 7.3.4.3 7.3.4.3 -
Part name POWER SUPPLY PCB-ASSY-IPB1 PCB-ASSY-WIM1 PCB-ASSY-VDD2 FUSE (IPB) FUSE (WIMl) IC (NVRAM) PCB-ASSY-RLY FUSE (HEATER)
7-6
Carriage head unit

Table 7-6
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Maintenance parts names (Carriage head unit)

Part name Part code U00085451500 U000810887** U00083005700 U000820991** U00085545000 U00085557300 U00081350800 U00085454800 U00084271600 U00084528000 7.3.5.4 7.3.5.4 7.3.5.5 Refer to 7.3.5.2 7.3.5.3 7.3.5.1
EDGE SENSOR ASSY PCB-ASSY-ICB1 HEAD CABLE 64 (for maintenance) PCB-ASSY-CNB1H COMPRESSION SPRING PRESSURE BOARD HEAD LINEAR ENCODER ASSY AIR DUMPER ASSY COOLING FAN
Wiping unit
Table 7-7
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Maintenance parts names (Wiping unit)

Part code U00084271400 U00087048000 U00084376100 U00036684000 U00094192700 U00036698500 U00036663600 U00075945300 7.3.6.5 7.3.6.6
Regular replacement part (once a year)
Part name WIPING UNIT (64) CLEANER (WIPER 64) UNIT BLADE (WIPER RUBBER 64) MOTOR (WIPER) ASSY SENSOR (WIPER HOME) ASSY SWITCH (WIPER 64) ASSY BELT (WIPER) ROLLER (CLEANER Sa) UNIT
Refer to 7.3.6.1 7.3.6.2 7.3.6.3 7.3.6.4

Regular replacement part (once a year) Regular replacement part (once a year)
7-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Capping unit
Table 7-8
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6
7
Maintenance parts names (Capping unit)

Part name Part code U00084174600 U00035952600 U00036259700 U00037102400 U00085987100 U00066733700 U00084179200 U00085230000 U00078672300 Refer to 7.3.7.1 7.3.7.2 7.3.7.3 7.3.7.7 7.3.7.8 7.3.7.9 7.3.7.5 7.3.7.4
Regular replacement part (once a year) Regular replacement part (once a year)
CAPPING UNIT (64) DC MOTOR (CAP) ASSY BELT TORQUE LIMITER PUMP-ASSY JOINT (CAP) CAP-ASSY SOLENOID ORlFICE
8 9
Ink cartridge unit

Table 7-9
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Maintenance parts names (Ink cartridge unit)

Part name Part code U00084184700 U00084201600 U00078078300 00076402100 U00079086300 U00079087400 U00084117300 U00087060300 U00084759600 U00084117300 U00091278000 U00084199400 U00089941400 U00089940300 U00084200500 U00084193700 7.3.8.1 Refer to 7.3.8.1 7.3.8.1 7.3.8.2 7.3.8.1 7.3.8.1 7.3.8.1
Regular replacement part (once a year)
lNK BOX L 64 ASSY INK BOX R 64 ASSY PCB-ASSY-INK 2 FILTER ASSY (SA) INK CARTRIDGE R CABLE 64 INK CARTRIDGE L CABLE 64 PUMP TUBE ASSY MOTOR ASSY (SP PUMP) lNK ABSORPTlON SHEET PUMP UNIT PUMP COVER (R) PUMP COVER (L) INK COVER (R) INK COVER (L) INK HOLDER COVER (FRONT) INK HOLDER COVER (SIDE)
7-8
Sub tank unit

Table 7-10
Number 1 2 3 4
Maintenance parts names (Sub tank unit)

Part name Part code U00084116200 U00083965400 U00087237000 U00084545800 Refer to 7.3.9.1 7.3.9.1 7.3.9.1 7.3.9.1
SUB TANK UNIT lNK PAD FULL SENSOR ASSY HALF SENSOR ASSY
Winder unit
Table 7-11
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Maintenance parts names (Winder unit)

Part code U00079150400 U00046076500 U00085462700 U00046032600 U00085991500 U00046034800 U00051863500 U00084336600 U00046069700 U00085222100 U00082330700 U00082331800 U00082332000 U00084548200 U00090021300 Refer to
Part name ROLL UP SWITCH ASSY LIMIT GEAR MINl KEEPER LIMlT SPRING REFLECTlON PLATE 64 ASSY MICRO PHOTO SENSOR GEARED MOTOR ASSY MINI KEEPER KNOB MEDIA SENSOR TENSION ROLLER A TENSION ROLLER B TENSION ROLLER C TENSION ROLLER D FLANGE SPACER (DRIVE SIDE)
Cables
Table 7-12
Number 1
Maintenance parts names (cables)

Part code U00027457700 Refer to
Part name SCSl CABLE ASSY (LVD-6H)
7-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Jigs
Table 7-13
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6
Maintenance parts names (Jigs)

Part code U00087407800 U00084551500 U00084713500 U00087070400 U000898762** Refer to
Part name ADJUSTER (HIGHT) KIT HEAD ADJUST JIG CAP HEIGHT GAUGE CARRIER BAR ENGINE F/W CARD HEATER F/W CARD
Dryer 64
Table 7-14
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 BREAKER RELAY SSR POWER SUPPLY UNIT TIMER THERMOSTAT THRM-CBL-ASSY VOLSW-CBL-ASSY FAN-ASSY FAN (EL-BOX) PCB-ASSY-DRY GUARD lNSULATOR (TERMINAL CAP) Part name
Maintenance parts (Dryer 64)

Part code U00086794700 U00086795800 U00086746000 U00086797100 U00086799300 U00086846500 U00086831800 U00086832000 U00086952300 U00086953400 U00089342501 U00088474400 U00087251500 Refer to 7.3.12.1 7.3.12.2 7.3.12.3 7.3.12.4 7.3.12.5 7.3.12.6 7.3.12.7 7.3.12.8 7.3.12.9 7.3.12.10 7.3.12.11 7.3.12.12 7.3.12.13
7-10
7.3
Maintenance Parts Disassembly and Reassembly

Reassembly procedures are not described in most cases. Reassemble parts in the reverse order of disassembly. If the replacement procedure is the same, a section to be referred to is shown.
CAUTION
Before starting maintenance, turn the power switch OFF and remove the power cable from the outlet.
WARNING
If ink sticks to an electrical part and an electrically conductive foreign matter attaches to the ink, it may cause fire, though ink itself is not conductive. If ink sticks to electrical or other components, wipe it off with cleaning paper.
For information on adjustment procedures, see Section 8, Adjustment.
7-11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Screws and E rings used for the printer Common parts (screws, etc.) used for disassembly and replacement are shown below. Number: CBK 3x6 S N Shape Screw diameter Material Screw length Surface treatment
Screws and E rings are based on ISO standard (metric). Use metric tools.
Drawing
Name
Abbreviation CBK4x8SZ CBK4x6SA CBK5x8SZ
Use
Cross recessed binding screw (silver)
Fix covers.
Cross recessed pan cup machine screw (gold)
CCUK4x8SZ CCUK4x5SZ CCUK3x20SZ
Fix most components, such as drive unit components, and fan.
Cross recessed machine screw with washer (gold)
CUKSK3x6SZ
Fix boards.
Cross recessed pan-head screw (gold)
CUK4x8SZ CUK2x8SZ
Fix motors and sensors.
Hexagon socket bolt (black paint)
AB3x20SZ
Hexagon socket bolt (gold)
AB4x8SB
E ring
ER10UO
The abbreviation and use columns show typical screws. For information on types of screws used for each part, see the replacement procedures in the following sections.
7-12
7.3.1
Covers and foot assembly 7.3.1.1 Ink cartridge cover (right) switch assembly (Ink cassette cover (front right)) <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
7.3.1.2
Remove the (5) side cover (Right), (3) top cover (Right), (9) ink cassette cover (Right), (19) side cover 2 (Right), (21) ink holder cover (Front right), and (23) ink holder side cover (Right). Remove the connector. Remove the ink cassette cover (right) switch assembly attached to ink cassette cover (Right).
Ink cartridge cover (left) switch assembly (Ink cassette cover (front left))
Ink cassette cover Switch
<Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the (4) side cover (Left), (2) top cover (Left), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), (18) side cover 2 (Left), (20) ink holder cover (Front left), and (22) ink holder side cover (Left). Remove the connector. Remove the cassette cover (right) switch assembly attached to ink cassette cover.
Ink cassette cover Switch
7-13
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.1.3
Interlock microswitch <Removal>
1. 2.
Remove (5) side cover (Right), (20) ink holder cover (Front left), (21) ink holder cover (Front right), (11) supply pump cover (Left), (18) side cover 2 (Left), and (27) wipe cover (Lower). Remove two screws securing the interlock microswitch, and remove interlock cable 64.
Green: 36V interlock switch Red: F/W interlock switch
NOTE
A plate and an interlock button are mounted behind the microswitch. The plate may fall off when the screws securing the microswitch are removed. Keep the plate in place.
3.
Remove the interlock cable 64 switch.
Microswitch
7-14
7.3.1.4
Photo sensor assembly <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the (10) paper guide (Front). Remove the connector. Lower the lever and remove the photo sensor assembly.
Photo sensor assembly
NOTE
Beware of damages to the sensor unit when removing and mounting the paper guide. When mounting (10) paper guide (Front), check whether latches around the grit roller are in the specified positions. Before removing (10) paper guide (Front), mark reassembling positions (two locations) at upper part of the guide near the screws so that it can be mounted at the same height to avoid skew.
7.3.1.5
Operation panel assembly, panel cable <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the (5) side cover (Right), (3) top cover (Right), (19) side cover 2 (Right), (16) front cover (Right), and (7) sub tank cover (Right). Remove all cables and connectors. Remove the operation panel assembly.
Remove Operation panel assembly
Remove
Loosen
Loosen (Fixed with ground wire)
7-15
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.1.6
Heater panel assembly <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove (4) side cover (Left), (2) top cover (Left), and (6) sub ink tank cover (Left). Remove all cables. Remove the heater panel assembly.
Heater panel assembly
7.3.1.7
Waste ink bottle sensor <Removal>
1.
Loosen the notch securing the waste ink bottle, and remove the waste ink bottle.
Notch
NOTE
Place waste cloth under the waste ink bottle to remove. The ink remaining in the bottle may spill out.
7-16
2.
Remove two screws from the socket of the waste ink bottle.
Screws
3.
Turn the socket of the waste ink bottle to the opposite side, remove two screws securing the waste ink bottle sensor, and cut Insulock tie.
Insulock tie
Screws
4.
7.3.1.8
Remove the connector.
Supply pump end sensor <Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the supply pump cover (Right). Remove a screw.
Screws
3.
Remove the connector.
7-17
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.2
Y drive unit 7.3.2.1 Photo sensor assembly <Removal>

Photo sensor assembly
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Move the Carriage to the wipe side. Remove the (5) side cover (Right). Remove the (3) top cover (Right). Remove the connector. Remove the photo sensor assembly.
NOTE
After replacing the photo sensor, check the capping position and adjust it according to Section 8.9, Capping Position Adjustment.
7.3.2.2
Carriage motor assembly, Bearing (DE-46562) <Removal>
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove the (5) side cover (Right), and (3) top cover (Right). Remove the connector. Remove the screw holding the motor bracket and loosen the synchronizing belt tension. Remove the Carriage motor assembly.
Synchronizing belt
Mounting of "Carriage motor assembly"
Bearing (DE-46562) Motor bracket
Carriage motor assembly
Hit the opposite side of the screw on the drive pully to the bearing and secure two screws. (screw torque: 14 kg fcm, 137.34 N-cm)
Motor
Control items for replacement
NOTE
1. Synchronizing belt tension: 41N2N4.18 kgf0.2 kgf 2. Synchronizing belt grease application: Tau Cosing Asia EM-60L See Section 8 Adjustment.
5.
Replace the bearing (DE-46562).
7-18
7.3.2.3
Two-step pulley assembly, synchronizing belt <Removal>
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Remove the (5) side cover (Right), and (3) top cover (Right). Loosen the screw holding the driven pulley assembly (7.3.2.5) and loosen the steel belt tension. Remove the screw (Carriage unit) holding the steel belt and loosen the steel belt. (see 7.3.2.4) Loosen the screw holding the motor bracket and loosen the synchronizing belt tension. Remove the two-step pulley assembly. Remove the Carriage motor assembly (see Section 7.3.2.2) and remove the synchronizing belt.
Steel belt Two-step pulley assembly
Synchronizing belt
Control items for replacement 1. Synchronizing belt tension: 41 N 2 N (4.18 kgf0.2 kgf) 2. Synchronizing belt grease application: Tau Cosing Asia EM-60L 3. Steel belt tension : 1.5N0.1N (0.15 kgf0.01 kgf) => Section 8, Adjustment
NOTE
Beware of the following to avoid damages to the steel belt: Dusts on the pulley. Wipe the pulley if it is dirty. Direct contact of the Y-rail hole and steel belt. Apply waste cloth on the steel belt. Do not touch the steel part directly.
7-19
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.2.4
Steel belt (64) <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the (5) side cover (Right), (4) side cover (Left), (3) top cover (Right), (2) top cover (Left), (9) ink cassette cover (Right), (12) ink cassette cover (rear right), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (11) ink cassette cover (rear left). Loosen the two screws holding the driven pulley (see Section 7.3.2.5.) and loosen the steel belt (64) tension. Remove the screws holding the steel belt (64) at the right and left sides of the Carriage assembly and remove the steel belt (64) through the hole in the Y rail.
Steel belt (64)
Screw holding the steel belt (64) (left)
Install the steel belt in the reverse order of removal. When the steel belt (64) is inserted into the hole in the Y rail, its end should be taped to a metal scale to facilitate the work. Steel belt (64) tension: 1.5N0.1N (0.15 kgf0.01 kgf) => Section 8, Adjustment
NOTE
7-20
7.3.2.5
Driven pulley assembly <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the (4) side cover (Left), (2) top cover (Left), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (11) ink cassette cover (rear left). Loosen the two screws holding the driven pulley assembly and loosen the steel belt tension. Remove the driven pulley assembly.
Screw Driven pulley assembly
Screw
Control items for replacement 1. Steel belt (64) tension : 1.5N0.1N (0.15 kgf0.01 kgf) => Section 8, Adjustment
NOTE
7-21
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.2.6
Pressure bracket assembly <Removal>
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Move the Carriage to the wipe side. Remove the eight covers (top covers, side covers, and ink cassette covers (rear/front). Remove paper guide (Front). (See Section 7.3.10.1.) Remove the acrylic cover and Y rail cover. (Remove the eight screws and the four screws at the lower front and remove the operation panel (two screws).) Remove the media feed motor. (See Section 7.3.3.1.) To remove the cam shaft, lift the lever and remove the E ring of the lever link mechanism. (Use care not to miss the E ring.)
E ring
Lever link mechanism
7. 8.
Move the cam shaft toward the media feed motor. Remove the pressure bracket assembly.
Pressure Bracket assembly
Remove the screws by inserting a screwdriver in the round holes on the catarpillar plate.
Round holes on the catarpillar plate
7-22
7.3.2.7
Pressure roller <Removal>
1.
Remove the pressure roller attached to the pressure bracket unit with a tweezers.
Pressure bracket assembly
Pressure roller
7-23
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.2.8
T fence <Removal>
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Remove the (4) side cover (Left) and (5) side cover (Right). Remove the (2) top cover (Left) and (3) top cover (Right). Remove the (12) ink cassette cover (rear right), (9) ink cassette cover (Right), (11) ink cassette cover (rear left), and (8) ink cassette cover (Left). Remove the (13) rear acrylic cover. Remove the (1) Y rail cover. Loosen setscrews (7 positions), remove the fence holding plate (64''), and remove the T fence assembly.
T fence assembly
T fence assembly
Setscrews (WS-screw) (6 positions)
Control items for replacement 1. The linear encoder assembly (See Section 6.3.5.5.) and T fence must not project. (Check it by moving the carriage unit to the right and left.) 2. Run the T fence into the left side (driven pulley assembly side) to assemble it.
NOTE
Do not touch the T fence assy. directly. Wipe the T fence assy. with dry cloth. Do not use alcohol or solvent.
7-24
7.3.2.9
Carriage cable 64 <Removal>
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove (4) side cover (Left), (5) side cover (Right), (2) top cover (Left), (3) top cover (Right), (1) y rail cover, (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (9) ink cassette cover (Right). Remove the (10) paper guide (Front). (see 7.3.10.1) Remove the cable holder (Carriage unit). Remove (cut) the cable tie.
NOTE
Beware of damages to the sensor unit when removing and mounting the paper guide. Be sure to insert the hook near the grit roller correctly when mounting (10) paper guide (Front). Before removing (10) paper guide (Front), mark reassembling positions (two locations) at upper part of the guide near the screws so that it can be mounted at the same height to avoid skew.
5. 6.
Remove the Carriage cover. Remove the cable from the PCB-ASSY-ICB1.
Caridge cable 64
PCB-ASSY-ICB1
Cable holder (carriage unit)
<Assembly >
NOTE
When replacing the second FFC from the top (connecting to ICB1 CN10), attach insulating sheet (carriage cable 64) U00089236100 on the new FFC. Place the FFC on the pattern paper to make sure of the location to attach before actually attaching the insulating sheet. For the folded FFC, the location is 5 mm from the folding farthest from the terminal.
7-25
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
The following work is required before mounting the FFC (Carriage cable 64):
60 mm
Insulating sheet
5 mm
1. 2.
Lay the pattern paper with the blue lettered (SUMITOMO-C) surface face-up and place the FFC on it. Attach the insulating sheet on the paper at the location shown above (on the blue lettered surface).
Insulating sheet (carriage cable 64) 60 mm
Carriage cable 64
Double-stick tape
3.
Fold the FFC at the ICB1 connection side (see the illustration below).
15 mm 15 mm 15 mm 10 mm
Mountain fold Valley fold
Folded FFC
Mounting four sheets of FFC
7-26
7.3.3
X drive unit 7.3.3.1 Media feed motor assembly and deceleration belt <Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the (5) side cover (Right), (3) top cover (Right), (9) ink cassette cover (Right), and (12) ink cassette cover (rear right). Remove the media feed motor pulley bearing plate.
NOTE
Do not lose the spring in the shaft.
3. 4. 5.
Remove the connector. Remove the motor installation panel. Remove the media feed motor assembly.
NOTE
To replace the paper feed motor assy., the carriage motor assy. needs to
be removed (see 7.3.2.2).
Media feed motor assembly
Deceleration belt Motor installation panel Carriage motor Media feed motor Pulley bearing plate Pulley shaft
Control items for replacement

Deceleration belt tension: 49 N 2 N (5 kgf0.2 kgf)
=> Section 8, Adjustment.

Deceleration belt grease application: Tau Cosing Asia EM-60L
7-27
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.3.2
Adsorption fan assembly <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the (14) paper guide (Rear) (see 7.3.10.2). Remove the duct and connector. Remove the adsorption fan assembly.
Adsorption fan
Adsorption fan
NOTE
Beware of damages to the sensor unit when removing and mounting the paper guide.
7.3.3.3
Paper sensor assembly (front) <Removal>
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove the (10) paper guide (Front) (see 7.3.10.1). Remove the connector. Remove the sensor bracket. Remove the paper sensor assembly (front) from the sensor bracket.
Paper sensor assembly (front)
NOTE
Beware of damages to the sensor unit when removing and mounting the paper guide. When mounting (10) paper guide (Front), check whether latches around the grit roller are in the specified positions. Before removing (10) paper guide (Front), mark reassembling positions (two locations) at upper part of the guide near the screws so that it can be mounted at the same height to avoid skew.
7-28
7.3.3.4
Paper sensor assembly (rear) <Removal>
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove the (14) paper guide (Rear) (see 7.3.10.2). Remove the connector. Remove the sensor bracket. Remove the paper sensor assembly (rear) from the sensor bracket.
Paper sensor assembly (rear)
NOTE
Beware of damages to the sensor unit when removing and mounting the paper guide.
7-29
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.3.5
Grit roller <Removal>
1.
Remove the following external covers: (4) side cover (Left), (20) ink holder cover (Front left), (11) ink cassette cover (Rear left), (18) side cover 2 (Left), and (27) wipe cover (Lower).
2.
Detach the wiping unit. 2-1 Detach the reinforced board.
2-2 Detach the wiping unit.
7-30
3.
Dismount (10) paper guide (Front).
4.
Detach the bearing holder.
5.
Loosen the screws of the grit roller joint.
6. 7.
Pull out the grit roller in the wipe direction. Slide the pressuring part holding bracket and unfasten the screws of the grit roller support block.
7-31
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
<Attach>
1.
Insert the grit roller from the wipe side.
NOTE
Avoid scratches on the grit roller caused by rubbing.
2.
Secure the grit roller joint.
3.
Secure the bearing holder.
7-32
4.
Attach paper guide (Front).
5.
Attach the wiping unit.
6.
Check the blade for its height after attaching the wiping unit.
7.
Attach the covers dismounted in procedure 1 of the removal in reverse order of the removal.
7-33
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.4
Electrical unit 7.3.4.1 Cooling fan assembly <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the (19) side cover 2 (Right) and (20) ink holder cover (Left). Remove the duct and connector. Remove the cooling fan assembly.
Paper sensor assy. (rear)
7.3.4.2
Power supply unit <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the (15) front cover (Center). Remove the connector. Remove the power supply unit.
Power supply unit
7.3.4.3
Board (PCB-ASSY-IPB1, PCB-ASSY-WIN1, PCB-ASSY-VDD2) <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the (15) front cover (Center). Remove the tray. Remove all the cables from the PCB-ASSY-IPB1, PCB-ASSY-WIN1, and PCB-ASSY-VDD2 boards and remove the boards.
PCB-ASSY-WIN1
PCB-ASSY-VDD2
PCB-ASSY-IPB1
7-34
7.3.4.4
Board (PCB-ASSY-RLY) <Removal>
1.
Remove the (15) front cover (Center).
PCB-ASSY-RLY
2.
Remove the voltage alternation switch assembly from the tray.
Loosen
Loosen
Voltage alternation switch assembly
3. 4. 5.
Remove all cables on the PCB-ASSY-RLY. Remove the tray. Remove the PCB-ASSY-RLY from the tray.
7-35
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.5
Carriage assembly, head unit Removing Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3. <Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the (4) side cover (Left), (2) top cover (Left), and (24) cap cover (rear left). Remove the Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3.
Carriage cover 3
Carriage cover 2
Carriage cover 1 (with a fan)
NOTE
Do not contact the fan connector with the ground when removing the cover.
Do not remove the connector with the relay connector attaching.
7-36
NOTE
Use care not to damage the head cable when removing or attaching the carriage covers. <Screw tightening order and torque for the carriage cover> Screw tightening order and torque for the carriage cover must be managed as follows: Screw tightening order management Follow the order below. Screw tightening torque management Fasten the screws in the order of 1->2->3->4 with a 49N (59 kgf) torque screwdriver as shown in the left photos.
NOTE
Check that the guide tube groove is set correctly in the cut.
Guide tube groove
Cut
7-37
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.5.1
Head cable 64 <Removal>
1.
Remove the (4) side cover (Left) (2) top cover (Right), (24) cap cover, Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3.
Carriage cover 3 Carriage cover 2
2.
Linear encoder mounting bracket
Remove the head cable 64 (see NOTE in 7.3.5).

Head cable 64
Linear encoder assy.
7-38
7.3.5.2
Edge sensor assembly <Removal>
1. 2.
Open the (13) rear acrylic cover. Remove the edge sensor ASSY.
Edge sensor ASSY Carriage
Edge sensor ASSY
NOTE
Use care not to lose the collar under the edge sensor.
7-39
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.5.3
PCB-ASSY-ICB1 <Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the top cover (Right) and (24) cap cover. Remove Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3.
Carriage cover 3 Carriage cover 2
3. 4.
Disconnect cables connected to PCB-ASSY-ICB1. Remove the PCB-ASSY-ICB1.

PCB-ASSY-ICB1
Head cable 64
NOTE
Use care not to damage the head cable when removing or attaching the carriage cover (see NOTE in 7.3.5).
7-40
7.3.5.4
Head ASSY, Cooling Fan
NOTE
Replace the head as soon as possible because the ink for IP-6600 dries up quickly. Do not leave the head with out capping for a long time. If doing so, the head is damaged due to nozzle choking. Adjust voltage after replacing the head. Always perform the head adjustment after replacing the head. (See Section 8 Adjustment.) Fill ink after replacing the head.
<Removal>
1. 2.
Turn off the printer while pressing down the
key.
Remove the side cover, the top cover, and the maintenance cover of the cap side. (When the printer is turned OFF, the head Carriage is in the cap side and the cap is in closed state.)
Top cover
Side cover
Maintenance cover
3.
Turn off the printer while pressing down the and keys. (This operation is to skip FILL CAP which is unnecessary in maintenance while FILL CAP always follows the normal power OFF.)
7-41
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4.
Remove Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3. (The two cooling fans are affixed to the Carriage cover 1. Do not forget to disconnect the cooling fan connectors.)
Carriage cover 2 Cooling fan connectors (two)
Carriage cover 3
Carriage cover 1 (w/fans)
NOTE
Beware of damages to the head cable when removing and mounting the carriage cover (see NOTE in 7.3.5).
5.
Remove the right and left screw driver guide tubes for the Carriage (head base) height adjustment screw.
Carriage height adjustment screw
Screw driver guide tube
6.
Remove the screws fixing the head cable board (two front) and remove the head cable from the head connector.
Head cable Head connector
Screw (one, front)
Head cable board
7-42
7.
Remove the head tube on the head ASSY to be replaced.

Ink tube Head tube Head tube
Ink tube
NOTE
Ink does not drop from the removed tube due to osmotic pressure. However, when the tubes are handled roughly, ink inside the tubes may spill out. Apply the cap which is attached at the time of installation on the joint at the printer side.
8.
Remove the front and rear screws securing the head, and remove the head assy.
Head ASSY screw (back)
Head screw (front)
(View from the top)
NOTE
Dispose the removed head ASSY.
7-43
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
9.
Replace a new head ASSY to the position where the replaced head was and secure the head screws (two) temporsly.
Head screw (back)
Head screw (front)
(View from the top)
10.
Attach the ink tube detached in step 7 to the head.

Ink tube Head tube
New head ASSY
7-44
11.
Connect the head cable disconnected in step 6 to the head connector, and then secure the head cable board with one screw (front).
Head cable
Screw (One, front)
Head connector
Head cable board
12.
Attach cover in reverse order of removal. In this section, only head replacement procedure is expained. Only procedure to replace the head is described in this section, but ink charge, checking of the ink reaching the head, checking of the ink tube on the head, and adjustments of the head mounting position are required after the head is replaced, and head replacement is completed when the head is secured, covers are mounted and head position is adjusted. See Section 8 for the subsequent head positioning and adjustments.
7-45
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.5.5
Linear encoder assembly <Removal>
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove the (4) side cover (Left), (2) top cover (Left), and (11) ink cassette cover (rear left). Move the Carriage to the wipe side. Remove the connector. Remove the linear encoder mounting bracket. Remove the linear encoder assembly.
Linear encoder mounting bracket.
Linear encoder assembly
7-46
Carriage (head base) height adjustment procedure
1. 2.
Remove the top cover and Carriage cover 1, 2, and 3. Before starting height adjustment of the Carriage (head base), move the Carriage to the center of the platen.
Platen
Carriage
3.
Insert the Carriage (head base) height adjusting jigs (round end) at 6.6 mm in the center dent (from both sides), and insert the Carriage (head base) height adjusting jigs (square end) at 6.2 mm in the rear dent (from both sides) to adjust the height at four points.
Carriage Round end 0.1 mm steps
6.6 mm
Square end 0.2 mm steps
6.2 mm
Carriage (head base) height adjusting jig (round end) Carriage (head base) height adjusting jig (square end)
NOTE
When adjusting the head base height, set the pressure roller UP/DOWN lever to DOWN. Move the head height UP/DOWN mechanism to the DOWN position.
7-47
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4.
Loosen three hexagonal screws securing the head assy. to the Carriage, and let the head assy. lower by its weight on four points on the Carriage (head base) height adjuster jigs (round end) at 6.6 mm and Carriage (head base) height adjusting jigs (square end) at 6.2 mm. Tighten the screws at 35 kg/cm toque. Tighten the screws at the cap side first, then the wipe side and at the center toward the head.
Three hexagonal screws
Head assembly
Head assembly
Carriage (head base) height adjustment jig Carriage (head base) height adjusting jig (square end)
5. 6.
Remove the Carriage (head base) height adjustment jig. Insert the Carriage (head base) height adjusting jigs again to check that the overall error is within 0.2 mm. If the error exceeds this range, adjust the height again.
NOTE
Always perform "Bi-directional print position correction" after adjusting height of the carriage. (See Section 8.18. Bi-directional Print Position (L) Correction)
7-48
7.3.6
Wiping unit 7.3.6.1 Wiping unit (64) <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the (2) top cover (Left), (4) side cover (Left), and (11) ink cassette cover (Rear left), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (27) wipe cover (OP). Remove the connectors. Remove the bracket (2 screws) in front of the wiping unit (64).
Bracket
4.
Remove the roller (cleaner Sa) unit of the wiping unit (64).
Gear cover
Gear cover
Roller (cleaner 64) unit
5.
Remove the gear cover (2 screws).
Gear cover
6.
Remove the wiping (64) unit (4 screws).
7-49
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.6.2
Cleaner (wiper 64) unit <Removal>
1.
Remove two screws at both sides.
2.
Remove the cleaner (wiper 64) unit by sliding.
NOTE
Mount the cleaner (wiper 64) unit with the film facing inside.
7-50
7.3.6.3
Blade (Wiper rubber 64) <Removal>
1. 2.
Turn the gear manually to move the wiper blade to upside. Remove four screws.
Wiper blade (wiper rubber 64)
Gear
See Section 8.7, Wiping Position Correction.
7-51
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.6.4
Motor (wiper) assembly <Removal>
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove the wiping unit (64) (4 screws). Remove the cover (push-in, black) and remove the mounting bracket screws (two). Remove the E ring and the first stage gear. Remove the connector. Remove the motor (wiper) assembly.
Gear
Motor (wiper) assembly
Cover
7-52
7.3.6.5
Switch (wiper) assembly <Removal>
1.
Remove the cleaner (wiper 64) unit (see Section 7.3.6.2), switch (wiper) assembly, and the connector.
Switch (wiper) assembly
7.3.6.6
Belt (wiper) <Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the wiping unit (64) (see 7.3.6.1). Remove the E ring and gears (3).
Gears
3.
Remove the screw with spring (left and right) (1 screw).

Screw with spring
NOTE
Do not lose the spring on the screw.
7-53
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4.
Remove the metal plate on the wiping unit (64).
Metal plate
5.
Remove the E ring, bearing spacer, and D-cut spacer.
6.
Remove the shaft and the belt (wiper) from the wiping
Belt (wiper)
7-54
<Mounting> Shaft at drive side
1.
Mount the belt (wiper).
NOTE
Mount the belt with its protrusion facing outside. Contact the belt with the home position sensor.
Home position sensor
Protrusion facing outside
2. 3.
Mount the shaft with the D-cut facing downward. Mount the metal plate into the square hole (secure one side with a screw).
Shaft at pulley side
1. 2. 3.
Mount the shaft along the groove, and temporarily secure it with a screw with spring. Insert the spacer and mount the E ring. Mount three gears and E ring.
NOTE
When tightening the screw with spring, adjust the belt tension according to 8.8 Wiping Unit Belt Adjustment.
7-55
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.7
Capping unit 7.3.7.1 Capping unit (64) <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the (5) side cover (Right), (3) top cover (Right), (12) ink cover (rear right), and (12) supply pump cover (Right). Move the Carriage unit to the wipe side. Remove the clamped cable, three screws securing cover brackets 3 and 4 (see the photos below), and cover.
Cover brackets 3 Cover brackets 4
4.
Remove the solenoid connector and motor connector.
Screws
5.
Remove six screws securing the front cover, loosen the remaining one screw, and remove the front cover.
Screws to remove Screw to loosen
7-56
6.
Remove six pump tubes connecting to the waste ink bottle.
NOTE
Waste ink may leak from the tubes. Place waste cloth underneath before removing the tubes. Cover the end of the removed tubes with waste cloth.
7.
Remove the capping unit (64) securing screws(*) and remove the capping unit. * W sems M4x12: 6 screws (four screws have already been removed in step 5), W sems M3x12 (small round): 2 screws NOTE
Mount the capping unit according to 8.10 Capping Unit Height Adjustment.
7-57
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.7.2
Motor (cap) assembly <Removal>
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove the capping unit (64). (See Section 7.3.7.1) Remove the two screws holding the cover (plate part) and remove the cover. Remove the connector. Remove the two motor mounting screws(*) and remove the motor (cap) assembly. * Screws: TP screws M3x6 nickel (four)
Motor
Cover
7.3.7.3
Timing belt <Removal>
1. 2.
Move the Carriage to the wiper. Remove the belt from the pulley.
NOTE
Align the phases of the front and rear pulleys when reinstalling the belt.
Timing belt
7-58
7.3.7.4
Solenoid <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the insulation lock tie holding the harness. Remove the connector from the capping unit (64) frame. Remove the screws holding the solenoid and remove the solenoid. * Screws: TP screws M4 x 6 nickel (four)
Solenoid
7-59
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.7.5
Cap assembly <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Move the Carriage to the wiper side. Remove the screws holding the plate for fixing the cap and remove the plate. * Screws: TP screws M3x6 nickel (four) Push the hook on the cap side and lift and remove the cap assembly.
NOTE
When replacing the cap assembly, replace two joints (cap) as well.
NOTE
Install it so that the hole in the sheet (cap) is in the direction of A. (See the following figure.)
NOTE
Apply alcohol to the hole in the joint (cap) before inserting the cap assembly.
Hole
Direction A
Cap assembly
7-60
7.3.7.6
Tray (ink) assembly

<Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the screws securing the tray (ink). Remove the tubes connecting to the waste ink bottle from the joints (at the waste ink bottle side). Lift the tray (ink) assy. and remove it by sliding. *Screws P tight M3 6 nickel (two)
Tray (ink) assy.
7-61
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.7.7
Torque limiter <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Move the Carriage to the wiper side. Remove the plate cover. Remove the shaft with the torque limiter. NOTE
Beware of the D-cut spacer to fall off.
4.
Remove the E ring and remove the torque limiter. * Screws: TP screws M3 x 6 nickel (two)
Torque limiter
7-62
7.3.7.8
Pump assembly <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Move the Carriage to the wiper side. Remove the tray (ink) assembly. Remove the cover brackets 3 and 4 and reinforcement 1.
4.
Remove the pump and tube ends from joints.
NOTE
Waste ink may leak from the tubes. Place waste cloth underneath before removing the tubes. Cover the end of the removed tubes with waste cloth. Beware of the mounting positions of the tubes: Right side: Cap, Left side: Waste ink
5.
Remove the screws holding the pump assembly and remove the pump assembly. * Screws holding the pump assembly: TP screws M3 x 6 nickel (two)
Pump assembly
7-63
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
NOTE
Mount the ink pump rollers so that adjacent rollers have difference in phase at 90.
The rollers should be seeable from the hole at the bottom.
The rollers should be seeable from the hole at the right.
7.3.7.9
Joint (CAP Sa) <Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the cap. (See Section 7.3.7.5) Remove the joint (cap).
Joint (cap): Push-in type
NOTE
Clean the boss on the plastic part side of this component with alcohol when installing the joint (cap). Apply alcohol and adsorb it.
7-64
7.3.8
Ink cartridge unit 7.3.8.1 Ink box (left/right) assembly, filter assembly (Sa), and pump tube <Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Perform ink extracting on the operational panel and than turn the printer off after completion of ink extracting. Remove (4) side cover (Left), (5) side cover (Right), (2) top cover (Left), (3) top cover (Right), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (9) ink cassette cover (Right). Remove the ink box (left/right) assembly fixing screws.
Pump unit
Joint
Pump Filter assembly (Sa)
Pump tube
4.
Remove the pump unit from the printer.
Pump unit
Pump
7-65
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.
Remove the pump.

Pump
Insulock tie
6.
Remove the joint of the pump tube.

Pump tube
Pump Joint
7.
Remove the filter assembly (Sa) screws, decompose the pump, and replace the pump tube.
Pump tube Pump
Filter ASSY (Sa)
7-66
NOTE
Carry out ink extraction from the operation panel before replacing the ink box L/R assy., supply pump tube, and filter assy. Do not wipe grease spreaded on the supply pump tube. Use care tie's position for assembling. Beware of the ink when handling the supply pump tube and filter assy. Beware of the force applied to the tube when mounting the supply pump tube. Beware of the grease on the supply pump tube to attach to Insulock tie. Pull out the ink cartridge when replacing the filter assy.
7-67
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.8.2
PCB-ASSY-INK 2 <Removal>
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove (4) side cover (Left), (5) side cover (Right), (2) top cover (Left), (3) top cover (Right), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (9) ink cassette cover (Right). Remove the ink box left/right assembly fixing screws (four screws). Remove the pump unit. Remove all cables.
Ink cartridge relay cables
Ink cartridge back cover
Ink cartridge back cover fixing screws
5.
Remove PCB-ASSY-INK fixing screws and PCB-ASSY-INK 2.
PCB-ASSY-INK2
7-68
7.3.9
Sub tank unit 7.3.9.1 Sub tank unit, full sensor ASSY, half full sensor ASSY. <Removal>
1. 2.
Perform ink extracting on the operation panel and the turn the printer off after completion of ink extracting. Remove (4) side cover (Left), (5) side cover (Right), (2) top cover (Left), (3) top cover (Right), (8) ink cassette cover (Left), and (9) ink cassette cover (Right). <Draining ink completely from sub tank before replacement> Remove the joint of the supply pump unit shown in the photo below.
Joint
Drain the ink remaining in the sub tank to the waste ink bottle. If the ink does not come out, push the sub tank to squeeze out the ink. (The photo below shows the ink drops on waste cloth.)
3.
Remove two joints of the sub tank assy.
Joint (front, rear)
Sub tank installation plate
Sheet (ST paper feed)
7-69
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4.
Remove the sub tank installation plate.
NOTE
Use care for handling the sub tank not to drop ink remained in the sub tank to the floor.
5.
Remove the sub tank frame.

Sub tank frame (8 screws)
6.
Remove the sensor installation plate. (The sensor plate is also off.)
Full sensor assembly Sensor plate Half sensor assembly
NOTE
Both half and full sensors have the same shape, but have different sensensing polarity. Install them to the correct positions.
NOTE
Always verify that the sensor plate works smoothly after installing
7-70
7.3.10 Heater unit 7.3.10.1 Paper guide F (with heater) <Removal>
NOTE
Before removing paper guide F, mark reassembling positions.
1.
Loosen the fixing screws of the paper guide F (with heater) and remove it. Note that the heater cable is connected to the paper guide F.
Paper guide F
Paper guide F Paper guide F Heater cable
7.3.10.2 Paper guide R (with heater) <Removal>
1. 2.
Loosen two screws on the media position regulating plate, and lift the plate. Remove the screws securing paper guide R, and remove paper guide R (with a heater). Pull out the heater cable with care.
Media position regulating plate
Paper guide rear Paper guide rear Paper guide rear Heater cable
NOTE
Beware of the paper guide hitting the front or rear of the paper sensor assembly, when removing and mounting the paper guide. Beware of the heater cable being caught or tumbled.
7-71
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.10.3 Platen assembly <Removal>
1. 2.
Remove paper guide R (with a heater). Remove the connector of heater cable.
3.
Remove the screws securing the platen, and remove the platen.
4.
Remove the media edge guard by sliding.
NOTE
If the platen receiver is equipped with a shim for correcting the height, do not remove the shim.
<Mounting>
1. 2.
Mount the media edge guard. Mount the platen while taking care of the heater cable not to be caught between the platen and platen receiver.
7-72
7.3.11 Winder Unit 7.3.11.1 Flange

Replacement of section (A) in the illustration below is explained.
Stopper shaft
E ring
Flange spacer
<Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the flange spacer. (B) stopper shaft appears. Remove the E ring and pull out the stopper shaft.
Use the same procedures for replacement in the wind (L), paper feed (R), and paper feed (L).
Paper feed (R) Wind (L)
Paper feed (L)
7-73
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.12 Dryer 64 7.3.12.1 Circuit breaker

<Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the front cover. Remove the circuit breaker.

Circuit breaker
N Label
NOTE
The wiring color indicated on N may differ depending on the region. Region Europe North America, Japan Color Blue White
7.3.12.2 Relay
<Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the front cover. Remove the wiring (4 lines), and remove the relay (upper and lower screws).
Relay
7-74
7.3.12.3 SSR
<Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the front cover. Remove the screws (2) at the secondary side, the screws (2) at the primary side and upper and lower screws (2), and demount SSR.
SSR
7.3.12.4 Power supply unit

<Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the front cover. Remove the connectors at input and output sides, and remove the power supply unit (4 screws).
Power supply unit
7-75
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.12.5 Timer
<Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the front cover. Remove the metal plate (upper and lower screws).
Timer
Metal plate
3.
Remove the socket. Remove the nut with a 5 mm screw wrench.

Nut
Socket Metal plate
4.
Remove the metal plate attached to the timer (2 screws).
7-76
7.3.12.6 Thermostat
<Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the terminals at both sides. Remove two screws to demount the thermostat.
Thermostat
7.3.12.7 THRM-CBL-ASSY
<Removal>
1. 2.
Remove (15) front cover (Center). Remove all cables of PCB-ASSY-IPB1, PCB-ASSY-WIN1 and PCB-ASSY-VDD2, and remove the boards.
7-77
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.12.8 VOLSW-CBL-ASSY
<Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the screw with a slotted screwdriver and pull out the volume switch. Remove the nut with a 12 mm screw wrench, and remove VOLSW-CBL-ASSY.
VOLSW-CBL-ASSY
NOTE
Align the MIN and MAX scales when mounting the volume switch.
Align the scales
7.3.12.9 FAN-ASSY
<Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the connector. Remove the nuts (2) with a 7 mm screw wrench. Remove the screws (2) on the surface, and remove FAN-ASSY.
FAN-ASSY
7-78
7.3.12.10 FAN (EL-BOX)

<Removal>
1. 2.
Remove the front cover. Remove the screws from the front cover. Remove FAN (EL-BOX).
FAN(EL-BOX)
7.3.12.11 PCB-ASSY-DRY
<Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the front cover. Remove all connectors. Remove the screws (4 screws) to demount PCB-ASSY-DRY.
PCB-ASSY-DRY
7-79
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.12.12 Flange insulator

<Removal>
1.
Remove the front cover and thermostat connector.
2.
Remove the terminals at both sides (black and white terminals).
NOTE
Do not lose the spacer attached to the terminal.
3.
Remove the upper and lower fan connectors (4) and remove the cover (4 screws).
7-80
4.
Remove the cover (8 screws).
5.
Remove the screws at the side (2 screws) and the terminal protecting insulator set.
Nut
6.
Loosen the nut with a hexagonal screw wrench, and remove the flange insulator.
Flange insulator
NOTE
Care should be taken when handling the flange insulator. It is easily broken.
7-81
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3.12.13 Terminal protecting insulator set

<Removal>
1. 2. 3.
Remove the front cover and thermostat connector. Remove the terminals at both sides (black and white terminals). Remove four fan connectors (upper and lower) and the cover (4 screws).
Terminal protecting insulator set
NOTE
Care should be taken when handling the terminal protecting insulator set. It is easily broken.
7-82
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 8
Adjustment
This section describes adjustment items for parts replacement or adjustment in the factory or field.
8-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.1
Steel Belt Tension Adjustment

If the two-step pulley assembly, driven assembly, or carriage assembly of the Y drive unit is replaced, the steel belt tension must be adjusted.
NOTE
- Move the carriage back to the cap side and measure the tension at the center of the belt. - Set the steel belt at the center of the vertical distance. - Move the carriage to the right and left and adjust so that the steel belt does not move vertically on the driven pully. - Adjust steel belt tension by the tension adjustment screw on the driven pully. Measure steel belt tension after moving the carriage two or three times between cap and wipe manually so that the steel belt fits.
500 g push/pull spring scale
Steel belt
Tension: 150 g Push the steel belt with the push/pull spring scale and read a value when the steel belt contacts to the Y-reel.
Steel belt
Tension adjusting screws
8-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.2
Head Cover Plate Adjustment NOTE

Lift up the head up/down lever before adjustment.
Adjust the height of the head cover plate when the CAP is in up status.
(Adjustment)
1. Open the CAP. (on the operation panel) 2. Move the carriage to the home possition. (on the operation panel)
Plate (for head base pressure) Head cover plate
Barerings
3. Loosen the screws which secure the plate (for head base pressure) and put
bare rings which are affixed to the plate (for head base pressure) to the head cover plate.
4. Secure the screws.
8-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.3
Synchronizing Belt (Y Drive Motor Belt) Tension Adjustment

If the Y drive motor assembly or two-step pulley assembly of the Y drive unit is replaced, the synchronizing belt tension must be adjusted.
Synchronizing belt Loosen the screws and adjust tension of the synchronizing belt (Y-Drive Motor Belt) by tension of the plate. Tension: 41 N 2 N (4.18 kgf0.2 kgf)
Y motor
8.4
Deceleration Belt (X Drive Motor Belt) Tension Adjustment

If the X drive motor assembly of the X drive unit is replaced, the deceleration belt tension must be adjusted.
Deceleration belt
X motor
Tension: 49 N 2 N (5 kgf0.2 kgf) Loosen the screws and adjust tension of the deceleration belt (X-Drive Motor Belt) by adjusting position of the plate to left or right.
NOTE
Adjust deceleration belt tension after removing the Y drive motor.
8-4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.5
Wiping Unit Height Adjustment

Loosen four screws to adjust the wiping unit height. Adjust the height of the wiping unit so that the carriege surface and wiping blade become parallel. If the wiping unit is replaced, the wiping unit height must be adjusted.
Loosen the screws
Wiping unit
8-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.6
Blade Height and Levelness Adjustment
NOTE
Set the head UP/DOWN mechanism to the UP position when adjusting the blade height.
Blade (wiper rubber 64)
Align the edge of the blade to the upper surface of the head.
Head
Blade
Blade
Belt
Align the right and left belts to place the blade on the level.
8-6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.7
Wiping Position Correction

The contact position of the blade (wiper rubber) relative to the head is corrected. <Parameter>
5 mm, 0.1 mm/step
+ : Move to the wiping unit side. - : Move to the capping unit side. (Correction procedure)
Carriage
Blade (wiper rubber)

(-) Capping unit side (+) Wiping unit side
With the carriage at the wiping unit, enter a correction value from the operation panel so that the wiping blade position is at the center of the surface of the head nozzles..
1. Press the
MEC.
keys, enter a password (press , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.
ADJ H. ADJ.
H. M NTE RESET
2. Press
menu.
key to select # WIPING POS.
ADJUST PATTERN TOP&BTM ADJ
3. Press
menu.
key to select # WIPING POS.
WIPING +3.0mm
POS.
8-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4. Turn
the wiping unit blade (wiper rubber) gear by hand, move the blade forward so that the blade (wiper rubber) position relative to the head can be visually checked, and verify that the blade contacts the head at the center.
Head
Carriage

(-) Capping unit side (+) Wiping unit side
NOTE
This adjustment must be performed when the carriage is at the wiping unit. Do not move the carriage when the blade (wiper rubber) is raised. Otherwise, the head may be damaged.
5. Enter
a correction value on the # WIPING POS. menu.
WIPING +1.0mm
POS.
6. Repeat
steps 4 and 5 to correct the position so that the blade (wiper rubber) contact position relative to the head is at the center.
7. As the last step, clean up pointed ends of

the blade (wiper rubber) with cotton swab which is moistened alcohol.
NOTE
The sheet of the blade (wiper rubber) is attached to the plate with double-stick tape. Use care not to instill alcohol into the double-stick tape.
8-8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.8
Wiping Unit Belt Adjustment

Adjust the tension of the belt when replacing the blade (wiper bar) or belt (wiper).
NOTE
When mounting the shaft, tighten the screw with spring till the remaining length of the screw reaches 13 mm.
13 mm
8-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.9
Cap Position Correction

The cap position relative to the head in the capping unit (home position) is corrected. <Parameter>
0 to + 5 mm, 0.1 mm/step
+: Shift to the wiping unit - : Shift to the capping unit (Correction procedure)
Head
Cap
(-) Capping unit side
(+) Wiping unit side
When the carriage is at its home position, enter a correction value from the operation panel so that the cap position is at the center of the head.
1. Press the
MEC.
keys, enter a password (press , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.
ADJ H. ADJ.
H. M NTE RESET
2. Press 3. Press
and select MEC. ADJ menu.
ADJUST PATTERN TOP&BTM ADJ
and select #CAP POSITION setting menu.
CAP POSITION +4.0mm
4. Visually check whether the cap position

is at the center of the head.
8-10
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. Enter
a correction value on the # CAP POSITION setting menu.

# CAP POSITION +3.0mm
(Example)
Note: If the correction value is 0, it does not work. (Capping is not performed in the sequence.)
6. When the rear cover is opened and

closed, the carriage capping position is adjusted according to the input correction value.
7. Repeat steps
4 to 6 to correct the position so that the cap is positioned at the center of the heads.
8. To reflect this setting, turn the power

off and on again or select H. ADJ.MOVE CARRIAGEHOME.
8-11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.10
Cap Unit Height Adjustment NOTE

Set the head UP/DOWN mechanism to the UP position when adjusting the cap unit height.
Adjust the height of the cap unit using height adjusting jigs.
Height adjusting jigs
(Adjustment)
1. Open the cap (from the operation panel or by adjusting the belt). 2. Loosen three outer screws (at both sides) and four bottom screws of the cap
unit.
Loosen
3. Mount the height adjusting jigs at four positions (see the photos below).
Jigs.
8-12
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4. Adjust the height manually. The bottom of at least three jigs should touch the
body.
Height adjusting jigs Height adjusting jigs
NOTE
The head may dry during adjustments. Carry out head cleaning and check the nozzle.
8-13
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.11
Shield HB Height Adjustment

Adjust the shield HB for preventing mists caused by side wind so as not to rub the platen.
Shield HB
Shield HB Screws (2)
NOTE
Make 2 to 3 mm clearance between the shield HB and the upper part of the platen. Shield HB
2 - 3 mm
Platen Adjust the shield HB height after 8.8 Blade (Wiper) Height Adjustment.
8-14
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.12
Initial Ink Charge/Ink Extraction

Initial ink charge
NOTE
The initial ink charge is required only when the printer is installed for the first time. When ink filling process is interrupted by an error (such as out-of-ink or lever open) during ink filling, do not proceed the ink filling. If doing so, there is the possibility of overflow of the waste ink. Complete initial ink filling with the following procedures: 1. Always replace the waste ink bottle to new one. 2. Remove the ink cassette cover (Rear R), carridge cover so that the head tubes can be seen. 3. Put FINISHED to INK CHARGE MODE menu in H.MNTE menu of the engine maintenance mode. When you put NOT YET to INK CHARGE MODE menu, cleaning is not performed. 4. When ink is filled up to the head, the normal cleaning is performed to fill the ink completely. When ink is not filled up to the head, perform cleaning a few times or pump absoption(*) to fill the ink up to the head. At last, always perform the normal cleaning to complete the ink filling. (*) : Select NORMAL in PUMP MOTOR menu in ACTUATOR menu of the engine maintenance mode to perform the pump absorption. When the ink is filled up to the head, stop the motor by STOP key immediately. If the motor is not stopped, there is the possibility of overflow of the waste ink bottle. 5. Leave the printer for about an hour to stabilize the printing operation. Prints often blur just after the initial ink charge.
Charge ink as follows:
1. Press 2. Press 3. Press 4. Press
key on the operation panel to enter the off-line mode.
INK
SETUP
PAPER
keys.
MAINTENANCE MODE PASSWORD?

MEC.
keys.
ADJ H. ADJ.
H. M NTE RESET
key to select the head maintenance menu.
INK CHARGE ALL
5. Press 6. Press
INK CHARGE ALL OK?
INK CHARGE EXECUTE
INK CHARGE ALL
8-15
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Ink extraction
NOTE
Be sure to extract the ink after replacing the head. Empty the waste ink bottle before extracting the ink.
Extract ink by the following procedure. Enter the maintenance mode from the operation panel and extract ink.
1.
Press
on the operation panel to enter the off-line mode.
INK
SETUP
PAPER
2. Press the 3. Press the 4. Press 5. Press 6. Press

guidance.
MAINTENANCE MODE PASSWORD?

MEC.
keys.
ADJ H. ADJ. CHARGE
H. M NTE RESET
key to enter the H. MNTE. menu.
INK INK
key to select INK EXTRACT.
EXTRACT
INK EXTRACT * OK?
7. Remove the ink cartridge according to the 8. Press

.
INK EXTRACT * EXECUTE
INK EXTRACT END POWER OFF
NOTE
It takes 7 to 8 minutes to extract ink.
8-16
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.13
Nozzle Check
8.13.1 Manual cleaning (the same function as the cleaning in the user mode)
1. Turn the power ON and press

, ,
to enter the
MEC.
ADJ H. ADJ.
H. M NTE RESET
maintenance mode.
2. Enter a password. 3. Press 4. Press

to select the H. ADJ. menu.
#ADJUST PATTERN NOZZLE CHK
key and print a pattern.
Direction of discharging
5. Observe the entire print with a magnifier

(x10), and verify that each pattern has no missing part.
If image quality defects occur due to a nozzle ejection error during installation or operation, take the countermeasures described below. If these measures do not solve the problem, replace the head.
8-17
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.13.2 Manual Cleaning
1. Turn the printer on and

press , , , keys to enter the maintenance mode.
2. Press
menu.
to enter the H. MNTE
3. Select CLEANING by the

key.
or
4. Select NORMAL by the

key.
or
5. Press
8.13.3 Fill Cap
the
key to perform the
cleaning.
This function can be performed from the user mode. This function fills ink into the cap to solve the nozzle choking by soaking the head (nozzle surface) in ink for one or two hours. Use this function when print dot off cannot be cleared by cleaning repeatedly.
1. Press the
key.
key.
2. Select SERVICE by the pressing 3. Select FILL CAP by pressing the

key.
SERVICE
FEED
CLEANING
# FILL
CAP
4. Perform fill cap by pressing the

key.
NOTE
Always perform the cleaning (normal) after performing the fill cap.
8-18
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.13.4 Discharging ink When the printer was instable or transportatted, ink charge was performed. If ink charge cannot be conplated successfully, bubble or dust remains in the nozzle. In this case, discharge ink, charge ink again, and check status with the nozzle check pattern.
1. Discharge ink. (See 8.12.) 2. Charge ink. (See 8.12.) 3. Charge status with nozzle check pattern print. (See 8.13.1.)
8.13.5 Cleaning with maintenance liquid cartridge If an ejection error occurs during installation or transportation or when it is not used for a long time and if it cannot be solved by the above procedure, clean the ink path and heads with refresh ink, charge ink again, and make a check.
1. Perform
the service clean sequence. (Discharge inkcharge the maintenance liquidcleaningdischarge the maintenance liquidcharge ink)
2. Charge ink. 3. Print a nozzle check pattern and check the status. (See 8.12.)
It takes approx. 40 minutes. After completion of the service clean sequence, leave the printer for one hour or more before print. Print right after service clean may cause print dot-off error.
8-19
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.14
Head Drive Voltage Setting
Set the drive voltage for each head. It must be set when a head is replaced. <Sub-menus>
Bk (L) , Bk (R) , Lm (L), Lm (R) , Lc (L) , Lc (R) , Y (L) , Y (R) , M (L) , M (R) , C (L) , C (R)
<Parameter>
XX.X (12.0 to 20.0)
(Correction procedure)
1. Press the
MEC.
keys and enter a password (press , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.
ADJ H. ADJ.
H. M NTE RESET
2. Press 3. Press 4. Press
and select the H. ADJ. menu.
H ADJ PAT NOZZLE CHK DRIVE BK (L)
and select the DRIVE VOLTAGE menu.
VOLTAGE
to select a sub-menu and select a head to be set with the or key.
DRIVE BK (R)
VOLTAGE XXXV
Head drive inscribed on each head
Read the head drive voltage marked on each head and enter and set that value.
(Example)
DRIVE BK (L)
VOLTAGE * 17.2V
Head drive voltage is inscribed.
8-20
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.15
Ink Head Adjustment Procedure

This adjustment (mechanical adjustment) should precede a series of corrections from Section 8.16 (parameter input corrections) when the ink head is replaced.
The ink head adjustment includes:
Adjustment in the sub-scanning direction Adjustment of head slants. Adjust the installation position of the ink head in the above order. Ink head adjustment patterns are provided for adjustments. Use the resultant prints to adjust screws, etc. This mechanical adjustment is the basic adjustment which should precede the parameter correction.
NOTE
When the carriage cover is mounted, it is important to keep the order of tightening the screws and control the tightening torque. Be sure to see 7.3.5 Carriage Assy. Head Unit.
The jigs listed in the table below are required for mounting and adjusting the ink head. Ink Head Adjustment Jigs
No. 1. Name Qty 1
Head positioning pin (long): for rear Head positioning pin (short): for front
2.
3.
Head positioning reference plate
4.
Head positioning adjustment jig 1
5.
Head positioning adjustment jig 2
Ink Head Adjustment Tools

No. 1. Name Qty 1
M3 screw driver (-) (short) M3 screw driver (+) (long)
2.
8-21
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Attach the head positioning adjustment jigs to the new head.
1. Loosen the adjustment screws on the head positioning adjustment jig 1

(turn the screws counterclockwise)
2. Combine the head adjustment jig 1 to the head positioning reference plate.
Tighten the adjustment screws on the head positioning adjustment jig 1 (turn the screws clockwise) until the bosses of the jig1 hit the wall of the head positioning reference plate to make the jig1 as the reference.
ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
3. Mount the jig1 to the new head to be adjusted.
HEAD
JIG 1
8-22
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4. Insert the head positioning pins long and short as shown in the figure as the
reference positions.
HEAD POSITIONING PIN (SHORT)
JIG 1
5. Fix jig 1 on the head base. (Tighten two jig 1 fixing screws on the jig 1 with a
screw driver ( - ).)
SCREW
SCREW
JIG 1
Loosen the screw in the back of the head to the degree that the head does not rattle.
6. Mount head position adjusting jig 2 on jig 1 as shown in the photos below.
(Hang the far end of jig 2 on jig 1 and secure the other end with a ring as shown below.)
JIG 2
8-23
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7. Fix the front head screw (only front, the back screw cannot be accessed
because the back screw is under the jig2) temporally as the head center position.
8-24
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Head installation adjustment in the sub-scanning direction
C Head sequence
Adjust each color head with reference to the black head. Adjust this position.
1. Turn the power ON, press

,
MEC.
keys and input a password (press , , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.
ADJ H. ADJ.
H. M NTE RESET
2. Press
and select the H. ADJ. menu and select H ADJ PAT, then HEAD ADJ.
8-25
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3. Perform the HEAD ADJ 2 print in H.ADJ PATTERN.

INK POS (R)
INK POS (L)
LEFT/RIGHT
HEAD POS
MECHANICAL ADJ
HEAD ADJ 2 PATTERN
- VERTICAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT - SLANT ADJUSTEMNT
8-26
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4. Move the carriage to the wiping unit

position from the operation panel.
Carriage
Wiping unit
NOTE
Wait for 10 seconds after the carriage moves its position.
5. Use the head slant adjusting pin to adjust

vertical positioning.
BOSS
VERTICAL POSITIONING ADJUSTMENT SCREW CLOCKWISE: UP ANTI-CLOCKWISE: DOWN 10 um / 1 scale 10 scales: 100 um
6. Align the horizontal lines of each color by

enlarging the locations marked with circles in the HEAD ADJ 2 pattern with a loupe.
See the vertical positioning with a loupe.
NOTE
The enlarged images will be reversed depending on the specification of the loupe. Blue light will make yellow clear.
8-27
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7. Tighten the screws and print H. ADJ 2 pattern. 8. If adjustment is not satisfactory, repeat steps 4 to 7. Adjust all colors in the same
way. Standard Within 70 m
Head inclination adjustment After adjusting the head installation position in the sub-scanning direction, adjust head inclination.
Head Adjust each color head inclination.
1. Press
keys
MEC.
and input a password (press , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.
ADJ H. ADJ.
H. MNTE RESET
2. Press
and select H. ADJ. menu and select H ADJ PAT, then HEAD ADJ.
H ADJ PAT * HEAD ADJ.
8-28
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

INK POS (R)
INK POS (L)
LEFT/RIGHT
HEAD POS
MECHANICAL ADJ
HEAD ADJ 2 PATTERN
- VERTICAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT - SLANT ADJUSTEMNT
8-29
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4. Move
the carriage to the wipe position using MOVE CARRIAGE from the operation panel.
Carriage Wiping unit
5. Use the head slant adjusting pin to adjust vertical positioning.
SLANT ADJUSTMENT SCREW CLOCKWISE: CLOCK WISE COUNTERCLOCKWISE: COUNTERCLOCKWISE 10 um / 1 scale 10 scales: 100 um
8-30
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.16
Head Position Correction (L and R)

Print adjustment patterns to correct the head position (L) in reciprocating movement.
<Sub-menus>
Bk, Lc, Lm, C,M,Y

<Parameter>
XX&Y-32 to +31 & A to H

Integer: In 1-dot unit Alphanumeric: In 1/8-dot unit
1. Press
in
MEC. ADJ
this order, and enter a password (press , , and ) to go in the maintenance mode.
H. ADJ.
H. MENTE RESET
2. Press
to go to the H. ADJ. menu and select H. ADJ PAT, then HEAD ADJ.1.
H. ADJ. PAT HEAD ADJ.1
8-31
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3. Print HEAD ADJ.1.

INK POS. (R)
INK POS. (L)
HEAD POS
-23
-24
-25
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
-31
-32
LEFT/RIGHT
8-32
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4. Go to the H-POS ADJ L/R menu. 5. Go

to the sub-menu by pressing or , and key.
# H-POS ADJ L/R # Bk
select a head to set with the
# H-POS ADJ L/R # Bk >+XX&Y
6. Press
. Select the polarity (+/-) with the [ ] or [ ] key, and enter the value of the most suitable pattern (L/R).
# H-POS ADJ L/R # Bk *+XX&Y
8-33
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.17
Head Position Correction (Main)

Print adjustment pattern HEAD ADJ.1 to correct the position of each head in the main scanning direction based on the black head.
<Sub-menu>
Lc, Lm, C, M, Y
<Parameter>
XX&Y-32 to +31 & A to H

Integer: In 1-dot unit Alphanumeric: In 1/8-dot unit
1. Press
, , and in this order, and enter a password (press , , and ) to go in the maintenance mode.
MEC. ADJ
H. ADJ.
H. MNTE RESET
2. Press
to select the H. ADJ. menu, and select H. ADJ. PAT., then HEAD ADJ1
# H. ADJ. PAT HEAD ADJ1
8-34
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3. Print the H. ADJ1 pattern.

INK POS (R)
INK POS (L)
HEAD POS
-23
-24
-25
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
-31
-32
LEFT/RIGHT
8-35
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4. Go to the H-POS ADJ. menu. 5. Go to the sub-menu by pressing

select a head to set with the or , and key.
# H-POS ADJ
Lc
(Example)
# H-POS. ADJ. # Lm >+XX&Y
6. Press
. Select the polarity (+/-) of correction value with the or key, and enter the value of the most suitable pattern (in the main scanning direction).
# H-POS. ADJ. #M
*+XX&Y
8-36
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.18
Bi-directional Print Position (L) Correction

An adjustment pattern is printed and the print positions for bi-directional printing of each head (L) are adjusted. <Sub-menu>
Bk, Lc, Lm, C,M,Y
<Parameter>
XX&Y (-32 to +31 & A to H
XX: 1 dot unit Y: 1/8 dot unit (Correction procedure)
1. Press
keys
MEC.
and input a password (press , , , keys) to enter the maintenance mode.
ADJ H. ADJ.
H. MNTE RESET
2. Press
to select H. ADJ. menu and select H ADJ PAT, then HEAD ADJ.2.
H ADJ PAT * HEAD ADJ.2
8-37
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

INK POS (R)
INK POS (L)
HEAD POS
-23
-24
-25
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
-31
-32
LEFT/RIGHT
8-38
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4. Enter I-POS. ADJ menu and select

medium to be used. * I-POS. ADJ values differ according to media thickness.
5. Enter INK POS (L) xxx menu.

XXXX: Media name.
INK Bk
POS (L) xxxx
6. Press
or
to select a sub-menu, and select the head to be set with the

key.
(Example)
INK INK
POS (L) xxxx > +XX&Y POS (L) xxxx > +XX&Y
7. Press
, specify the polarity (+/-) of the correction value with the , key, and enter a value.
8-39
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.19
Bi-directional Print Position (R) Correction

An adjustment pattern is printed and the print positions for bi-directional printing of each head (R) are adjusted. The procedure is same as 8.18 Bi-directional Print Position (L) Correction.
8-40
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.20
Paper Feed Amount Correction

Select a correction percentage for the initial paper feed amount for each paper to be used by printing an adjustment pattern, and select and enter a correction value percentage with little banding. A coated paper must be used for this correction, and the correction values for other media are automatically determined and input based on the value for coated paper. Using FEED PATTERN is recommended for simple and fast adjustment. <Parameter> 97.0 to 103.0
8-41
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.20.1 Adjustment using FEED PATTERN The pattern figure is shown below. Always set the winding unit to the tention wnding mode for adjustment.
1. Press
,
, , ,
,, keys and enter a password (press keys) to enter the maintenance mode.
2. Select paper to be used in PAPER when mounting paper. 3. Enter FEED PATTERN menu and print a test pattern in ROUGH (BASE).
Pattern print with 99.00% correction value Pattern print with 99.25% correction value Pattern print with 99.50% correction value Pattern print with 99.75% correction value Pattern print with 100.00% correction value Pattern print with 100.25% correction value Pattern print with 100.50% correction value Pattern print with 100.75% correction value Pattern print with 101.00% correction value
8-42
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4. Chose a correction value so that white or black lines do not appear in side of
(1) lines in (2) area of the below figure.
(2)
(1)
Use Bk and C colors for adjustment. (2) area enlarged figure
5. Enter PAPER FEED ADJ menu and input the correction value selected in step 4. 6. Enter FEED PATTERN menu and print a test pattern in DETAIL.
Pattern print with the current value -0.12%. Pattern print with the current value -0.06%. Pattern print with the current value. Pattern print with the current value +0.06%. Pattern print with the current value +0.12%.
8-43
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7. Choose a correction value in the same manner in step 4. 8.

Enter PAPER FEED ADJ menu and input the correction value selected in
step 7.
8-44
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.21
Head Position Correction (Main scanning direction)

Print an adjustment pattern "HEAD ADJ. 1", and correct each head position in the main scanning direction based on the black head. <Sub-menu>
Lc, Lm, C,M,Y
<Parameter>
XX&Y (-32 to +31 & A to H
XX: 1 dot unit Y: 1/8 dot unit (Correction procedure)
1. Press
, , , keys and enter a password (press , , , keys) to enter the
MEC.
ADJ H. ADJ.
H. MNTE RESET
maintenance mode.
2. Press
to select the H. ADJ. menu, and select H ADJ PAT, then HEAD ADJ.
H ADJ PAT * HEAD ADJ.
8-45
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3. Print a head adjustment pattern (H ADJ PAT1).

INK POS (R)
INK POS (L)
HEAD POS
-23
-24
-25
-26
-27
-28
-29
-30
-31
-32
LEFT/RIGHT
8-46
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4. Select the H-POS. ADJ. menu. 5. Press

or
H-POS. Lc
ADJ.
to select a sub-menu, and select the head to be set with the

key.
(Example)
H-POS. Lm
ADJ. > +XX&Y
6. Select the fittest pattern from the HEAD

POS print pattern. The correction value is marked on the upper side of the print pattern. Press , specify the polarity (+/-) of the correction value with the , key, and enter a value.
H-POS. M
ADJ.
*+XX&Y
8-47
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.22
Side Margin Position Correction (SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ)

The distance between the edge sensor and the head (side margin) is corrected by printing and cutting paper in the adjustment pattern (top & bottom). After printing, the distances are measured and the parameter is set. <Parameter>
5 mm, 0.1 mm/step
36mm
(-)
Specification: 5 mm (+)
1. Press
, , , keys and enter a password (press , , , keys) to enter the
MEC.
ADJ H. ADJ.
H. MNTE RESET
maintenance mode.
2. Press
to select MEC. ADJ. menu, and select ADJUST PATTERN, then TOP&BTM ADJ. an adjustment pattern (TOP&BTM
ADJUST PATTERN * TOP&BTM ADJ
3. Print
ADJ).
Direction of discharging Metal measure
4. Measure the side margin with a metal

measure, press
, select SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ menu, and enter a correction value.
Specification: 5 mm
SENSOR
(SIDE) ADJ
> -1.0mm
8-48
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Example:
# SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ > -1.0 mm
Print Sample
4 mm
# SENSOR (SIDE) ADJ > -2.0 mm
Print Sample
5 mm
8-49
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.23
Top Margin Position Correction (SENSOR (TOP) ADJ)

The distance between the edge sensor and the head (top margin) is corrected by printing and cutting paper in the adjustment pattern (top & bottom). After printing, the distances are measured and the parameter is set. <Parameter>
5 mm, 0.1 mm/step
Specification: 5 mm Direction of discharging
36 mm
1. Set
the paper set mode to SAVE in the REGISTER menu.
2. Cut the paper with a cutter to align the edge. 3. Set the paper. 4. Press
, , ,
MEC.
keys and enter a password (press , , , keys) to enter the
ADJ H. ADJ.
H. MNTE RESET
maintenance mode.
5. Press
to select the MEC. ADJ. menu, and select ADJUST PATTERN, then TOP&BTM ADJ.
# ADJUST PATTERN * TOP&BTM ADJ
8-50
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6. Print an adjustment pattern

(TOP&BTM ADJ).
7. Measure the top margin with a metal

, select SENSOR measure, press (TOP) ADJ menu, and enter a correction value.
(Example)
4 mm
Specification: 5 mm

Metal measure
SENSOR
(TOP) ADJ
> -1.0mm
Example:
SENSOR
(TOP) ADJ
> -1.0mm
Print Sample
4mm
SENSOR
(TOP) ADJ
> -2.0mm
Print Sample
5mm
8-51
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.24
Appendix
Skew Correction Procedures 1. Check and correct skew according to the skew checklist. [Screw Check Items] 1) Paper setting (1) Warp Check the preset paper for its warp and the paper roll for its looseness. (2) Flange There shall be no gap between the flange and paper roller end face.
2) Mechanism (1) Paper guide F Check paper guide F for its installation position. The installation height of the guide should be horizontally leveled. If any skew is found in field, first check the media setting state as well as the paper guide attachment state. (2) Grit roller attachment (screw loose-fitting in the joint) Lift the pressurizing unit and check the grit roller for its backlash. (3) Pressurizing rollers gripping force grip the strip film to the pressurizing unit and check the gripping force of the film. Follow the measurement steps below: (Measuring method) Apply a gripping force measurement jig (film) to pressuring rollers one by one. Go down and keep the pressurizing roller. Measure the gripping force using a push-pull gauge. The gripping force should be measured from roller to roller. A reference value of the gripping force is 650 g. It can vary depending upon the value of matte-based film and the surface state. The measurement value should be a value preset when staring up the film. (Criteria) The difference between the measured maximum and minimum values shall be within 30% of the maximum value. If it exceeds 30%, increase or decrease a load applied to the pressurizing spring and adjust it so as not to exceed 30 %.
Punch one position on the end face of the strip film using a puncher and insert a gauge in the punched hole. Size of Strip Film*: approx. W40 mm x L 210 mm (*or commercial OHP films)
(4) Check the vacuum fan for its operation.
8-52
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3) Paper feeding status (1) Check external impact during paper feeding. (2) Check aerial impact from air conditioners.
4) Miscellaneous (1) Paper check: Check that genuine paper is used and there is no crashes or breakage on the end of paper. (2) Operation environment check: Check that the temperature and humidity are within the specified range of the operation temperature and humidity.
2. When there is no problem as a result of examination instructed in Section 1, namely screws have not been corrected, check the positions of the grit roller supporting block and the platen box. 1) Uncover the top cover (right and left plastic covers and Y rail cover). 2) Remove the capping unit and the wiping unit. 3) Check the positions of the grit roller supporting block and the platen box. (1) Platen box position control point: Apply to X-rail. (2) Grit roller supporting control point: Apply to the paper feeding side of the platen box. (3) Check and correction Uncover the respective covers and visually inspect the inside from both sides. There shall be no gap among the X-rail, the platen box and the grit roller supporting block. If not, loosen the screws fastened to the platen box and the grit roller supporting block. Let push the platen box and the grit roller supporting block to X-rail, and secure them.
3. When any problem was found as a result of examination instructed in Section 2, follow the correction steps below: (1) Remove the guide plate, guide plate R and L. Store them so as not subject the tube and FFC to stress. (2) Remove the bracket to hold the pressurizing unit. (3) Lift the pressurizing bracket. While lifting the bracket, loosen the screws that fasten the grit roller supporting block using a special screwdriver or ratchet. (4) Push the platen box and the grit roller supporting block up to the specified position, and fasten the grit roller supporting block securing screws. (5) Attach the pressurizing holding bracket. (6) Attach the guide plate and guide plates R and L.
8-53
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(7) Attach the capping unit and the wiping unit. (8) When there is no problem after completion of steps i through vii and skew check, attach the top cover. 4. When a problem cannot be found as a result of examination instructed in Sections 1 and 2, adjust eccentricity of the grit roller. Correct the optimum value that varies from side to side after paper feeding adjustment patterns are printed. Incorrect adjustment of eccentricity of the jointed grit roller can generate skew. Any eccentricity of the grit roller at the wiping unit side can usually generate screw. Adjust the grit roller towards the wiping unit side. Adjustment steps are as follows: (1) Remove the paper holder at the joint unit, i.e. plastic blade attached to the pressurizing roller. (2) Loosen the two screws that fasten the coupling and turn the grit roller of the wiping unit about 45 degrees. (3) Fasten the two screws, attach the paper holder and check the paper feeding adjustment patterns. (4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) and find the point where the optimum value of paper feeding adjustment patterns are equal from side to side. You should turn the grit roller of the wiping unit one side.
5. Skew Criteria Print two PATTERN3 (3 m in length and 1-dot checkered patterns), and judge skew based on the skew size and print head rubbing. Paper should not be reset until printings are completed. Print head rubbing occurred during printings (2 sheets of paper) should be rejected as NG: Not Good, even if the skew size shall be not larger than 5 mm on a longitudinal standard basis.
8-54
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Section 9
Operations
This section describes the mechanical operations of the paper transport system, carriage transport system, ink system, and operations of the electric control system, engine controller firmware, and network controller firmware.
9.1
System Operation Overview

The roll paper set in the printer is fed by grit rollers and passed over the platen in the X direction. The piezo heads that pass over the platen in Y direction eject color inks for printing. The platen sucks paper with a vacuum fan to adjust the correct gap between the paper and the head. The heads installed on the carriage are driven by the carriage motor (DC servo motor) with a steel belt and moved horizontally. The head position is detected with a linear scale, linear encoder, and edge sensor. A maintenance stage (MS) is installed to prevent stains and damage to the head surface due to drying when it is not used for a long time. The MS protects the head surface by its cleaning with a wiper, suction and capping with the capping unit. Cleaning is performed after printing a specified area. Capping is performed automatically by the capping unit after printing. Ink is supplied directly to the head from the ink cartridge through a tube. The printer has three heaters; a front heater for pre-heating of the media in the for media supply side, a print heater for penetrating and fixing ink under the platen unit, and a rear heater for drying in the media outlet side. The paper feed unit and paper delivery unit have a paper feed sensor and a paper delivery sensor to detect paper jams.
Y direction
Guide rail
Rear heater
X direction
Head
Roll paper Paper delivery sensor Print heater Grit roller Front heater Paper feed sensor
Figure 9-1
Outline of operation
9-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
9.2
Paper Transport System

The paper transport system consists of units 1 to 7 shown in Figures 9-2 and 9-3.
<Transport system mechanism (X axis)> (Auxiliary operation)

DC motor Winding roll Loose sensor Platen Paper sensor (rear) Head
Bk Lm Lc C M Y
IPB board Winding control
Sensor control
Servo control Edge sensor Carriage Paper holder Paper Grit roller Lever sensor DC servo motor Rotary encoder Roll paper Pressure roller up/down Paper sensor (front)
Figure 9-2
Transport system mechanism (X axis)
<Transport system mechanism (Y axis)> (Main operation)
IPB board
DC
Servo control
Print timing Home position sensor
Steel belt
Carriage Linear encoder T fence (linear scale)
DC servo motor Suction fan Platen
Head
Edge sensor
Figure 9-3
Transport system mechanism (Y axis)
9-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 9 Operations
1)
Paper feed unit The paper feed unit can perform 2-way feeding of roll paper and cut sheets. The paper feed unit can be operated from the front. Remove roller paper and set cut sheets according to the guide line on the front paper guide. The Pressure roller up/down lever is used to release the pressure roller grip when roll paper and cut sheets are set. The lever sensor is a photosensor located near the nip release lever on the right side frame to detect lever opening/closing. If the nip is released, paper cannot be transported. Therefore, if nip release is detected, the machine operation stops. If the nip is detected again, paper may be set again, it is used as a signal that performs a paper detection sequence. Roll paper or cut sheets are specified from the operation panel. The type of media is also specified from the operation panel. The paper feed sensor is a reflective type photosensor installed on the paper feed controller. It detects paper by reflection over its surface so that the engine controller firmware recognizes the paper condition.
2)
Drive unit The drive unit consists of an X motor (paper feed motor), a grip roller, a pressure roller and a lever. The paper feed motor is a DC servo motor for paper feeding, which is controlled by the software servo control unit of the engine controller. When this motor is run, the grip roller turns and transports the paper gripped by the pressure roller. The pressure roller is gripped or released by the lever.
3)
Platen and suction fan When paper is transported to the platen, it stucks to the platen by sucking air through the holes in the platen to prevent its lift and contact with the print heads. There are three suction fans. Each of the three fans can be driven independently of each other according to media width. The sucked air is exhausted from the bottom of the machine.
4)
Paper guide, paper delivery sensor The paper guide is a guide plate that is curved to prevent bending of the printed paper on the platen. The paper delivery sensor is a reflective type photosensor installed on the paper outlet, which detects paper by reflection over its surface so that the engine controller firmware recognizes the paper condition.
5)
Interlock switches The four interlock switches are installed on the rear cover to detect cover opening/closing. When the cover is opened, the interlock switches turn OFF to forcibly turn OFF the +35 V and +24 V power of the power supply unit. The carriage and other drive units are forced to stop.
9-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6)
Winder The printer can print a drawing up to 50 m long (software dependent). The winder is used to wind such a long drawing and is installed on the bottom of the electrical box of the main unit. The winder must be installed when installing the printer. The winder consists of a winding unit (right and left), a loose sensor and a winding scroller. The winding scroller has a paper core at the time of installation. If another paper core is necessary, use a paper core of an used paper roll. Tape paper on the scroller paper core, and set paper so that it moves over the sensor on the right winding unit. This sensor is called a loose sensor and when paper blocks the sensor light path, the engine controller firmware recognizes that the paper is loose and winds it. If the winder is not used, place, the tension bar on the winder unit. 1) Tension winding The printer supports the tension winding mode winding the media with pulling tention by the winding unit, additionally to the slant winding mode. The following two items must be done to alternate the winding mode. 1. Winding mode alternation the operation panel. 2. Changing the tension bar position. 2) External winding / internal winding
Both outward and inward winding directions can be specified. The winding direction can
be selected regardless of the winding modes. Change the winding direction by using the alternation switch on the winding unit. Only when the slant mode is used, the sensor position must be adjusted according to the winding directions. 3) ON/OFF Set the external winding/internal winding switch lever center to turn the winding unit OFF.
9-4
9.3
Carriage Transport System

The carriage transport system consists of units 1 to 6. 1) Carriage motor DC servo motor located under the left cover of the printer. This motor moves the carriage forward and backward and controls its speed from the minimum to the maximum value. The speed is controlled by detecting motor revoluations and position from the linear encoder installed on the Y rail. (The ink ejection timing is controlled by the linear encoder signal. There are three carriage speeds: 1) 705 mm/sec (Printing) 2) 230 mm/sec (For maintenance, except for printing) 3) 20 mm/sec (Paper edge detection) 2) Carriage The carriage is a print unit installed on the Y rail of the printer with a bearing, and is driven by a motor with a steel belt. This unit has a carriage board, six heads, an edge sensor, and a linear encoder. 3) Carriage board The board installed on the carriage has the following features: Relay data, clock, head drive voltage, etc. coming from the engine control board to the heads. Relay signals from sensors, such as thermistor output (head temperature), paper edge detection, inside temperature, and linear scale reading, installed on the carriage. Convert a differential signal coming from the engine control board to the signal format appropriate to the print heads. 4) Edge sensor Located at the side of the carriage. The edge sensor detects paper on the platen, the right and left sides, and leading edge of paper, and controls the entire printing as a reference for paper when the CPU on the engine control board detects print start position, cut position and skew. The edge sensor sends a signal from the carriage board to the engine control board and it is detected by the CPU. 5) Home position sensor Photo sensor located at the home position of the Y rail of the printer. The engine controller cannot recognize the carriage position immediately after the power turns ON, so it is moved to the position (home position) where the home position sensor turns ON to detect the initial position of the carriage.
9-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6)
T fence (linear scale), linear encoder Sensor (photo interrupter) installed on top of the carriage. Since the absolute position of the carriage must be recognized at all time for printing, a T fence (linear scale) is installed in the range of the carriage movement. The linear encoder sensor reads the linear scale and generates two-phase clocks with different phases. The engine controller firmware recognizes the absolute position of the carriage all the time by counting pulses from this sensor. The signal detected by the linear encoder is used for servo control of the carriage motor. Ink is ejected from the head nozzle according to the output signal from this sensor.
9-6
9.4
Ink System
The ink system consists of an ink cartridge, cartridge box, ink supply tube, capping unit, wiping unit, carriage board, engine control board and ink system control firmware as shown in Figures 9-4 and 9-5.
13 Ribbon cable 10 Carriage board
12 Ribbon cable
1 Head 11 Carriage Capping unit
5 Air open solenoid Catapillar Scraper Air dumper 3 Porous sheet 2 Cap rubber 6 Orifice Wiper blade
4 Pump 7 Joint tube
14 Waste ink bottle Absorber
Sub tank Ink supply pump 9 Ink supply tube 8 Ink cartridge
Figure 9-4
Ink System
Ink system overview

FFC
ICB
Print Head Wipe roller Blade Tube Solenoid
(Pressure of the atmospheric)
Joint
Blade position sensor Wipe unit Ink supply pump Filter
Cap unit
Sub tank Sub tank FFC
Pump
Waste bottle
Ink supply pump
PCB-INK Pin connector PCB-CAR Needle
DC motor Micro switch
IPB
(Engine board)
Ink empty sensor Ink cartridge
SCSI
Figure 9-5
Ink system concept
9-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
1)
Heads The heads used for the printer are driven by electrostriction vibrators. A signal voltage pulse is applied to a piezo element to distort it and change the capacity of the ink pressure chamber to eject ink. The printer has six heads for six colors, using a head with 512 nozzles for each color, to implement high-speed printing. Drive frequency Each nozzle is driven on 10 KHz, and the ABC sequence is driven on 30 KHz. Since the print head changes the capacity of the ink pressure chamber by distorting the piezo elements arranged like comb teeth, the adjacent channels cannot be ejected at the same time. The incoming print data is divided into three groups (A, B, and C) for which ink is ejected in order. Since the basic nozzle layout of the head is 180 dpi, a resolution of 720 dpi is implemented by four passes. Temperature control Ink changes in viscosity with temperature, so the drive voltage is controlled according to the temperature. Air damper To prevent damage to the head meniscus by the movement of the ink in the ink tube due to acceleration of the carriage, a damper is installed to reduce variations of pressure.
2)
Ink cartridge Ink is contained in a laminate film pack. The capacity of each color ink cartridge is 1000 ml. A pack is set in the plastic cartridge (case). The ink pack has a sensor that detects the remaining amount of ink. A memory chip is installed in the end of the pack (near the ink supply section) to store IDs in the manufacture process and store various logs from the printer during use. Memory ID: Ink type ID (color) Manufacture date Unit record log: Ink consumption
9-8
3)
Cartridge box The cartridge box has ink cartridge slots: three slots for Bk, Lc, and Lm at the left, and three slots for C, M, and Y at the right side of the printer. The cartridge box has an insertion error prevention mechanism, shutter, ink needle, and an ink relay board. Insertion error prevention mechanism, shutter Each color ink cartridge has a different insertion error prevention key and the cartridge box face has a slit corresponding to each cartridge. Each cartridge can only be inserted into its slot. Ink needle A needle is inserted into the spout of the ink cartridge pack, the ink in the pack joins and is supplied to the tube. Ink relay board Relay board that reads from and writes into the ink cartridge memory Ink cartridge cover switch Micro switch located under the right and left ink cartridge covers Switch that detects ink cartridge cover opening and closing. When this switch detects closing of the cover after replacing the ink cartridge, an ink cartridge replacement sequence starts.
4)
Ink supply tube The ink in the ink cartridge set in the printer is supplied to the head unit through the ink needle, filter, ink pump, and ink tube. The 20-micron filter that follows the ink needle traps rubber scraps that are produced when the ink cartridge pack is torn. When an ink cartridge is installed, the ink is supplied to each ink pump by an ink charge operation.
5)
Capping unit Configuration The capping unit is located at the right side of the printer. The capping unit is driven by a pump motor and two air open solenoids. When the pump motor runs normally, it turns the cam, lifts the cap and rotates the pump (suction). When the motor runs reversely, the cap is lowered and no pump operation is performed with a one-way clutch. Functions When the carriage is at its home position, capping and ink suction is performed with the pump motor. When the carriage is at its home position, capping is performed to protect the head surface. A porous sheet is installed in the cap rubber to prevent ink bubbling in the cap during suction and suck ink in the cap during empty suction.
9-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Ink pump The ink pump is a rotary tube pump that sucks ink by squeezing the rubber tube by rotation. The ink pump rotates the cam roller with a pump motor and squeezes the rubber tube to suck ink. The pump tube is always squeezed by the cam roller, so ink does not flow back. Three or six colors are sucked at the same time by turning the air open solenoid ON/OFF that will be described later. The waste ink sucked by the pump is discharged into the waste ink bottle. Air open solenoid The air open solenoid is a DC solenoid, and opens or closes the orifice at the end of the tube connected to the cap rubber with the rubber installed at the end of the solenoid plunger by turning the solenoid ON/OFF. The DC solenoid plunger has a spring, and its force is used to close the orifice to shut out the outside air. Two DC air open solenoids are used to control suction of Bk, Lc, Lm, and C, M, Y. When ink is sucked by an ink suction operation and the pressure is released, the cap rubber is filled with ink. Meniscus is formed in the head nozzles by removing (sucking) the ink. If this operation is not performed, the meniscus is broken when the cap filled with ink is opened. The ink in the cap and the air are sucked by turning the air open solenoids ON and performing a suction (empty suction) operation to form a meniscus. 6) Wiping unit Configuration The wiping unit is located at the left of the printer (the opposite side of the capping unit). The wiper blade is used by installing an urethane rubber on a caterpillar belt. The wiper unit rotates the belt on which the wiper blade is installed and wipes the head surface with the blade edge. The wiper is rotated by running the wipe motor (DC motor) in the unit. The motor runs in only one direction. Functions The wiper blade cleans the head surface to prevent ink ejection bending. The pad cleans the wiper blade that cleans the head surface. The wipe motor turns the wipe blade. 7) Waste ink bottle The waste ink bottle is made of HDP (High Density Polyethylene). The waste ink is used to collect the waste ink absorbed by pumps. The maximum capacity of the bottle is approx.3 little.
9-10
9.5
Print Functions
1) Cleaning sequence The printer has the following cleaning sequence to maintain the optimum printing. Cleaning is performed with the capping unit, wiping unit and ink system control firmware. Flushing is carried out with the head unit and control firmware. Manual cleaning Manual cleaning is performed by operating the menu from the operation panel. It is used if missing nozzle dots are not solved by automatic cleaning that is performed by the printer. Automatic cleaning This cleaning is performed automatically during printing. Cleaning when the printer is not used (fill cap) This cleaning is performed automatically when the printer is not used to guarantee the optimum printing for the next printing. Interval, time, and ink consumption
Require d Time 3.25 min. Ink consumption Engine F/W V2.** Engine F/W Waste ink V1.** Normal save Approx. Approx. Approx. 2.5ml/color 2.2ml/color 1.1ml/color Approx. 2.5ml/color Approx. 2.5ml/color Approx. 4.3ml/color Approx. 2.5ml/color Approx. 2.5ml/color Approx. 6.0ml/color Approx. 2.2ml/color Approx. 2.2ml/color Approx. 3.3ml/color Approx. 2.2ml/color Approx. 2.2ml/color Approx. 6.0ml/color Approx. 1.1ml/color Approx. 1.1ml/color Approx. 3.3ml/color Approx. 1.1ml/color Approx. 1.1ml/color Approx. 6.0ml/color
Function Manual cleaning (normal) Auto cleaning
Interval
Every operation At start of 1st printing after cleaning when the printer is not used (FILL CAP) When printing history contains 999 or more scans at start of printing When printing history contains 1110 or more scans at end of printing When printing history contains 333 or more scans at start of printing Every 444 scans during printing After 20 hours since the printer moves to standby, then every 72 hours.
3.25 min.
Auto cleaning (cleaning mode 1) Auto cleaning (cleaning mode 1) Auto cleaning (cleaning mode 2) Auto cleaning (cleaning mode 2) Cleaning when the printer is not used
3.25 min.
5.25 min.
3.25 min. 3.25 min.
0.15 min.
9-11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
2)
Head drive voltage control Head drive voltage rank setting The head drive voltage is set for each color to keep a constant density and stabilize ink ejection. Since the drive voltage differs due to manufacture variations (lot, material characteristics, and processing), the voltage is marked on each head at the production stage. The drive voltage shown on the head is set from the operation panel in the adjustment process in the unit assembly plant. Temperature control As temperature decreases, the viscosity of ink increases, and as it increases, the viscosity decreases. When viscosity increases, high energy is required to eject ink. On the contrary, when viscosity decreases, energy may be low. The ejection energy is controlled by changing voltage. It is controlled digitally. The temperature of the head PZT element is detected with a thermistor, and a specific drive voltage is set and the head is driven by engine controller firmware control. The parameters for this temperature control is listed, and it is different for each head voltage rank.
3)
Bi-directional shift correction in the main scanning direction Print dot position correction function during bi-directional printing of the carriage
4)
Head position correction This function corrects the position where the ink drop hits if it is incorrect due to the head installation position or head ink ejection speed variations.
5)
Side registration correction This function corrects the print start position in the paper width direction. Variations of each unit for the design value are corrected by software.
6)
Edge registration correction This function corrects the print start position in the paper feeding direction. Variations of each unit for the design value are corrected by software.
7)
Vertical magnification correction This function corrects variations in paper feed amount. Variations of each unit for the design value are corrected by software.
8)
Dot position adjustment in the sub-scanning direction The dot drop position of each head is adjusted by adjusting the paper feeding direction of each head is adjusted mechanically (with screws).
9)
Head inclination adjustment The inclination of each head is adjusted mechanically by turning it (with eccentric pins) to adjust the position where the ink drop hits.
10)
Head L, R adjustment The jet timing of right and left heads are adjusted.
9-12
11)
Paper smoothness action If paper is left in the printer for a long time, the leading edge may be wrinkled and cause a paper jam. The paper is discharged when printing starts after the setting time to eliminate such a deformed part of paper. Operations When the printer receives no print data and waits a print at exceeding of setting time, the printer feeds the edge of the paper roll automatically upto the front of the rear cover. (This action is ommitted when the edge of the paper roll exists in the front of the rear cover.) After receiving print data, the printer performs paper smoothness action (repetitious feed and rewind) and then cuts the edge of the paper roll automatically. At powering off the printer, the printer feeds the edge of the paper roll upto the front of the rear cover and then shutdowns automatically. (When using the winder unit, the printer shutdown with no action.) When using the sheet paper, the printer feeds out the paper after setting time. NONE Automatic edge cut function does not work in all types of paper. 30 min Automatic paper smoothness action works after 30 minutes for all types of paper. Before 30 minutes, the printer performs paper smoothness action before print. (Do not set 30 min for the sheet paper.) 1 hour Automatic paper smoothness action works after 1 hour for all types of paper. 2 hour Automatic paper smoothness action works after 2 hours for all types of paper. 4 hour Automatic paper smoothness action works after 4 hours for all types of paper.
9-13
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Selection criteria, paper waste length

Cut Parameter Selection criteria Less than set time Paper waste length Rewind More Less More than than than set time set time set time 0mm 0 mm Approx. 250 to 400 mm Approx. 250 to 400 mm Approx. 250 to 400 mm Approx. 250 to 400 mm Approx. 50 to 150 mm 0 mm Approx. 300 to 400 mm Approx. 300 to 400 mm Approx. 300 to 400 mm Approx. 300 to 400 mm
NONE 30 min
Choose it when use a continuous print Choose it when prints in high-humidity environment Choose it when prints in one-hour interval Choose it when prints in two-hour interval Choose it when prints in four-hour interval
1 hour
0 mm
2 hours
0 mm
0 mm
4 hours
0 mm
0 mm
NOTE
1.
2.
Paper waste length shows paper feed length for cutting a paper wrinkle. Determine a setting time according to condition of use to avoid paper wrinkle. For example, choose "1 hour" when you print in one-hour interval and want to avoid paper wrinkle.
12)
Drying time setting function For media with slow drying time, if the next print is made after ink dries, ink may blur. To prevent this problem, the function provides a wait time for each scan and prints after ink dries.
9-14
9.6
Principle of Head Drive

Head diagonal view
Cover plate
Electrode Channel Wall Actuator Orifice
Nozzle plate
Principle of Head drive

Nozzle plate Actuator B ejection
1 period C ejection A ejection
Interactive waveform ON waveform Interactive waveform Interactive waveform OFF waveform Interactive waveform (Three channels comprise a group.)
Electrical field orientation ON waveform = H
First stage
Interactive waveform = L
Second stage
Interactive waveform = H Electrical field orientation ON waveform = L Electrical field orientation
Electrical field orientation Interactive waveform = L Interactive waveform = H
Figure 9-6
Head drive principle
Head structure The head ink drive unit consists of an actuator with grooves that look like comb teeth, a cover plate, and a nozzle plate. The actuator consists of a channel filled with ink, a wall and an electrode formed on the half of the wall. There is an orifice (hole) for ink ejection for each channel. Ink is ejected from the orifice by vibrating the wall.
9-15
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
9.7
Print Mode
Mode Draft High-speed Standard High-density High-quality Draft 2-pass High-speed 4-pass Standard 4-pass High-density 8-pass High-quality 8-pass
External resolution (VxH)(dpi) 360 x 360 360 x 360 720 x 720 720 x 720 720 x 720
Internal resolution (VxH)(dpi) Pseudo 720 x 720 720 x 720 720 x 720 720 x 720 720 x 720
Ejection frequency (kHz) 10 10 10 10 10
Pass 2 4 4 8 8
<Print mode>
1) Draft mode 720 720 (draft 2-pass) (Unit: inch) 360 dpi 360 dpi input resolution is expanded to pseudo 720 dpi 720 dpi for printing by the engine. ( , )
1/360 1st 2nd 1/360
9-16
2)
High speed mode 720 dpi 720 dpi (high-speed 4-pass) (Unit: inch) 360 dpi 360 dpi input resolution is expanded to pseudo 720 dpi 720 dpi for printing by the engine.( , )
1/720
1/720
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
9-17
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3)
Standard mode 720dpi x 720dpi (4-pass) (Unit: inch)
1/720
1/720
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
9-18
4)
High-density mode 720dpi 720dpi (High-density 8-pass) (Unit: inch) One dot is printed twice.
1/720
1st, 3rd 2nd, 4th 5th, 7th 6th, 8th
1/720
5)
High-quality mode 720dpi x 720dpi (High-quality 8-pass) (Unit: inch)
1/720
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th
1/720
9-19
9.8
9-20 9.8.1
Carriage motor Head cooling fan FAN Operation panel Carriage board Paper feed motor Serial for maintenance
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Head board
Thermistor 30-pole FFC12 selector Cooling fan 30-pole FFC4 Data & clock buffer Driver receiver Driver receiver CPU, memory, I/O
Vacuum fan 3
Basic configuration
Motor driver DC servo
IPB1 (Engine Control) Board
Figure 9-7 is a block diagram that shows basic hardware configuration of the IP-6600 printer. It consists of six basic blocks (hatched areas).
Figure 9-7
Head control Edge sensor/ Linear encoder Custom power supply Engine controller +36V/+24V +12V/+5V Data conversion To P/S Band memory VDD2 voltage variable circuit Service station Wiper Heater control panel Wiper motor sensor Ink relay board Ink cartridge WIM1 Host I/F SCSI Capping pump motor solenoid Cartridge sensor serial E2PROM
Head
Winding SWC. loose sensor motor H.P. sensor
6 colors
Connector changing board
Interlock
AC power
Basic hardware configuration
Paper delivery sensor Paper feed sensor
Heater
Others Actuator Lever sensor
Front heater
Relay board
SSR
Rear heater
SSR
SSR
Print heater
9.8.2
Engine Unit Operation Head board (Head assembly) The head board has piezo elements with 512 nozzles and eight driver ICs, and has six heads for six colors. The head ASSY is connected to the carriage board which relays head signals with two 30-pole FFC cables and a connector conversion board (CNB1H). The drive voltage for the head piezo element is 16 V (set by the F/W according to the temperature feedback). The logic voltage is 5 V. Connector conversion board (PCB-ASSY-CNB1H) The connector conversion board is used to change the head board connector to the connector for the TFC cable. Carriage board (PCB-ASSY-ICB1) The carriage board is installed on the carriage and relays data to six head assemblies. In addition to relaying data to the heads, it has the head temperature detection voltage and carriage internal ambient temperature detection voltage buffer and selection (amplifier circuit/analog multiplex) circuit. It contains the edge sensor for paper width and leading edge position detection (light-emitting diode current can be changed in four steps by the firmware), linear encoder (two phases, 180 dpi), and paper cutter up/down solenoid driver. It also has a driver/receiver IC as the data transfer circuit between the carriage and engine controller. Engine controller board (PCB-ASSY-IPB1) The engine controller board is a core circuit block of the print engine and provides the following functions.
(1) (2)
CPU (single-chip 32-bit CPU (SH-2), peripheral I/O, A/D converter (internal)) Memory (SRAM memory (program), flash memory (boot program, system program, test pattern, engine parameter backup storage), SDRAM (band memory storage), IC memory card (program load), NVRAM (parameter store)) I/O (PIO, RTC) Host interface (SCSI I/F) X, Y motor control (DC servo control), other motor control (ON/OFF control) Various sensors/actuator/mechanical switch port control (solenoid, interlock switch, photo sensors, etc.) Head drive voltage variable control (15 to 32 V): VDD2 board that is different from the IPB1. Data pass conversion (band memory control, data conversion, dot interpolation, margin generation, print mode, forward/backward print) Operation panel control (Dedicated circuit: The dedicated circuit for communication with the panel is incorporated.)
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
(10) Others (Detection of the paper end)
Service station Capping unit: Cap the heads and suck. Wiping unit: Wipe head nozzle surface.
9-21
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Ink cartridge The printer supplies ink directly to the heads through tanks. Therefore, ink only exists in the head internal flow paths and ink tanks, as well as ink cartridges. The printer detects the remaining amount of ink in an ink cartridge by counting (calculating) the number of ink ejections. If it exceeds a specific value, a near-end warning is given. An ink cartridge contains an involatile memory (serial E2PROM) to store and update the remaining quantity of ink in each color ink cartridge. This memory contains ink IDs and manufacture dates, etc. to maintain ink quality. The remaining amount of ink is also detected from the change in the tank shape in the cartridge. If the sensor located on the bottom of the ink cartridge detects ink-out, the end of ink is reached. The communication with the involative memory is performed by F/W timing control through the PIO port on the engine controller board. Mechanical control block This block has a main function of controlling the carriage motor and paper motor DC servo. In addition, it controls and operates the actuators (pump motors, wiper motors, solenoids, cutter motor, vacuum fans, etc.) of the service station and ink supply system. Motors and Solenoids
Part name X motor (Paper feed motor) Y motor (Carriage motor) Suction fan (1 to 3) Capping motor Air open solenoid (1, 2) Wiping motor Ink supply motor (1 to 6) Winding motor Cooling fan Head cooling fan Type DC motor DC motor DC sirocco fan DC motor Solenoid DC motor DC motor DC motor DC motor DC sirocco fan Voltage 36V 36V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 12V Control method Software servo Software servo ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Simultaneous control of 2 fans Simultaneous control of 2 fans, Air flow is controllable. Detection Overcurrent Overcurrent Lock detection Overcurrent Air flow is controllable Remarks
9-22
Sensors
Name Vaccum fanlok sensor (1 to 3) Wipe sensor Sub-tank full sensor (1 to 6) Sub-tank half sensor (1 to 6) Media end senssor Stackness sensor Winding switch X encorder Y encorder Home position sensor Lever sensor Media supply sensor Media output sensor Interlock switch 1,2 Print pause/Restard switch Print stop switch Waste bottle sensor Edge sensor Temperature sensor (main body) Temperature sensor (carriage) Head temperature sensor Ink motor sensor (1 to 6) Ink cartridge detector (1 to 6) Cartridge cover detector switch (1, 2) Type Hall element (built-in fan) Micro switch Solid photo interrupter Solid photo interrupter Micro switch Reflective photo sensor Lever switch (ON-OFF-ON) Rotary encorder Linear encorder Photo interrupter Photo interrupter Photo refecter Photo refecter Micro switch Push button switch (momentary type) Push button switch (momentary type) Micro switch Photo refecter Thermistor Thermistor Thermistor Photo refecter Contact Micro switch Sensing method PIO input PIO input PIO input PIO input PIO input PIO input PIO input (1) PIO input (2) Pulse contact Pulse contact PIO input PIO input A/D conversion A/D conversion PIO input PIO input PIO input PIO input A/D conversion A/D conversion A/D conversion A/D conversion PIO input PIO input PIO input "L" Rotation At detectable position Not full More than half-full Remain None
FACE DOWN FACE UP
"H" Lock Not at detectable position Full Not half-full Media end Exist Stop Stop
Cable break
H
H H H H H H H H
None None Exist Exist close Push Push Exist (platen) (High temperature) (High temperature) (High temperature) Ink path is close Exist close
Exist Exist None None Open Lerease Lerease None (Media) (Low temperature) (Low temperature) (Low temperature) Ink path is open None Open
H H H H H H H H L H H H H H H
SCSI interface block (WIM1) Physical specifications: WIDE-SCSI (16 bits)

ULTRA2
LVDS level (low voltage differential) 68-pin half-pitch connector Recommended environment for host computer (PC) Adaptec AHA-29160
9-23
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Data pass system This block receives data from a host or network controller in the engine controller, buffers and processes it into head transfer data, and sends it to the heads. All its functions are implemented by hardware. Band memory The band memory is a memory that is physically separated from the main memory (CPU system memory + work RAM), and is a band image memory area that temporarily stores image from an upstream device. Images can be written directly into the memory from the CPU, and test patterns are generated in this way. Images are written directly into the band memory without passing through the CPU from an upstream SCSI I/F or network controller. Image data transfer from the host computer to the print engine supports three methods: line order, band surface order, and cell order. When a scan starts, data required for a scan is maintained, so it is called a band. Although it is a band memory, image data arrangement in it is different according to print modes (high speed, standard, super high quality). [Band memory specifications] 256 MB for six colors (1) Memory capacity 256-Mbit synchronous DRAM (2) Memory (3) Power supply voltage +3.3 V ATG (Band Memory Address Generator) block This block corresponds to a gate array. It reads from and writes into the band memory (SDRAM) at high speed. It writes in the scanning direction and reads in the direction of nozzles (the scanning direction is perpendicular to the nozzle direction for this printer). Therefore, orthogonal conversion is performed. [ATG function] (1) Block memory access (2) Memory address generation (3) Synchronous DRAM timing generation (4) Mirror processing (bit swap: forward path , backward path ) RSM block This block performs various processes, such as addition of right and left print margins in each print mode and mirror processing (bit swap) for bi-directional printing, and finally transfers processed data to the PTG block. [RSM function] (1) Orthogonal conversion (horizontal/vertical conversion) (2) Dummy data addition in X direction (main scanning direction) (3) Dummy data addition in Y direction (sub scanning direction) (4) PTG transfer (PTG interface) (5) Mask processing. Mask scan line or column data according to print mode (720 720 dpi, 8 passes, bi-directional printing)
9-24
Head data transmission FIFO This FIFO is built into the BRP and located between the RSM and PTG. It functions as an intermediate buffer to transfer binary head data converted to head nozzle arrangement from the RSM to each of the six heads. PTG (Pixel Timing Generator) block This block serially transfers the head data converted by the preceding RSM block (data converted to nozzle arrangement) to driver ICs in six head assembly (eight driver ICs for each head), and adjusts timings for kicking ink ejection at a desired timing in synchronization with the ejection timing from the linear scale. This PTG block is physically divided into two chips, PDD and PTC. The head data from RSM is distributed to each head at PDD. The ink discharge timing is controlled at PTC based on the signals from the linear scale. [PTG specifications] (1) 720 dpi ejection rate (fire rate) generation (2) Fire timing adjustment A positional shift in the scan direction is set as a parameter for each of six heads, and fire timing is fine-adjusted. Specifically, each fire interval is divided into approx. 16 minutes and a desired time constant is added to fire timing. (3) Uni-directional/bi-directional printing Bi-directional printing is basically performed. Thus, the change in head control according to the printing direction is set as a parameter, and fire timing is fine-adjusted. (4) Three-phase timing Control fire timing by three groups A, B, and C, which is unique to the heads. Image interface A normal voltage level differential driver receiver is used as a driver receiver for the image interface for the Carriage board. Head drive voltage control The head drive voltage is adjusted in two steps. +36V generated in the power supply unit is varied to near the desired head voltage on the VDD2 board which is mounted on the IPB1 board, and then adjusted to the desired head voltage on the ICB1 board. There are two different head drive voltages; the voltage supplied when the PZT expands (called the ON voltage) and the voltage supplied when the PZT contracts (called the OFF voltage). These voltages are generated on the existing VDD2 board as follows: VDD2 out channel
ch2 ch5 ch1 ch4 ch3 ch6
Head voltage for ICB board ON voltage for head 1 and head 2. OFF voltage for head 1 and head 2. ON voltage for head 3 and head 4. OFF voltage for head 3 and head 4. ON voltage for head 5 and head 6. OFF voltage for head 5 and head 6.
<Example> The VDD2 board generates higher voltage of head 1 ON voltage or head 2 ON voltage + from ch2, and the ICB1 board regulates head 1 ON voltage and head 2 voltage. The head drive voltage is controlled by feeding back the head temperature during print because the suitable head drive voltage changes successively according to the
9-25
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
head temperature. Operation panel The operation panel is used to input various parameters of the printer and display information. It has a LCD module and input keys. The operation panel is controlled directly by the CPU on the engine controller (via PTG). Therefore, print adjustment patterns are output and various maintenance functions can be executed from the operation panel. [Operation panel requested specifications] 16 characters, 2 lines (1) LCD Alphanumeric (with backlight) , online, enter, cancel, shift (2) Key tops ONLINE, DATA, ERROR, INK, ROLL (3) LED (One for INK/ROLL each) (5) Power supply voltage 5V TTL, serial communication (6) Interface Automatic (7) Buzzer
9-26
9.9
9.9.1
Engine Control Firmware

Function blocks SCSI / Engine F / W function block
Operation panel
Thermistor
Operation panel driver
Abnormal monitor task
Temperature correction task
SCSI I/F
SCSI driver
Print task
Setup task
Maintenance SIO
Maintenance driver Carriage driver FLASH driver Ink EEPROM driver Sensor monitor task
FLASH
Actuators
Ink EEPROM
Sensors
Figure 9-8
SCSI/Engine F/W function block
9-27
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
9.9.2
Operation description [Operation description: SCSI/Engine F/W function block] The SCSI/Engine F/W operates on the WEC and WIMI boards, and controls the engine components, SCSI interface and network controller interface. The main function block of the SCSI/Engine F/W includes the following: Operation panel driver SCSI driver Carriage driver
: Controls the operation panel LCD, LEDs, keys and
buzzer input/output.
: Controls the SCSI interface. : Controls various actuators to implement the
mechanical system printing operation and ink system maintenance. Maintenance driver Temperature correction task Sensor monitor task Setup task Flash driver Ink EEPROM driver Error monitor task Print task
: Controls the serial interface for the maintenance
console.
: Monitors thermistors. : Monitors sensors. : Performs various operations from the operation and
prints internal patterns.

: Reads from and writes into flash memory. : Reads from and writes into the EEPROM built in
the ink cartridge.

: Monitors sensors and engine errors. : Controls band memory and print data.
9-28
9.10
Power Supply Unit
9.10.1 Electrical specifications - AC input specifications 80 VAC to 260 VAC 1Input voltage 47 Hz to 63 Hz 2Input frequency Single 3Phase DC output specifications
No. 1 2 3 4 Item Rated output voltage Rated output current Average current Adjustment range (pseudo load) CH1 +36 V X, Y motor/head drive 7A 5A 0.05V CH2 +24V motor 4A 2A 0.05V CH3 +12V HDD 3A 2A 0.05V CH4 +5 V logic/3.3 V generation 8A 6A 5.05V+0.05V
9.10.2 Connector specifications Inlet (3 pins)

Pin number 1 2 3 ACLIVE (AC1) AC NEUTRAL (AC2) FRAME GND (FG) Signal name
Interlock input
Pin number 1 2 3 INTSW IN N.C INTSW OUT (36V) Signal name
9-29
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
CN1 Engine controller board/RIP controller board +5 V/+12 V output

Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 +5V (logic) +5V (logic) +12V +5V (logic) +5V (logic) +12V Signal name Pin number 7 8 9 10 11 12 Signal name GND GND GND GND GND GND
CN2 Engine controller board +24V/36V

Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 +24V +24V +36V (motor) +36V (motor) +36V (motor) +36V (VDD2) +36V (VDD2) +36V (VDD2) Signal name Pin number 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Signal name GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND
* 36 V is divided into two systems.
CN3 Power ON/OFF control input (from WEC)

Pin number 1 2 3 4 CTL36_ON CTL24_ON CTL12_ON CTL5_OFF Signal name Pin number 5 6 7 8 Signal name PNLSW_ON +5V_STANDBY GND GND
9-30
9.10.3 ON/OFF sequence

The power on/off state transition is shown below. The main switch is a circuit breaker.
All outputs OFF Power OFF state From all states Main SW OFF Stop Main SW OFF Main SW ON Panel SW ON
OFF
+5V ON
(3.3 V is produced at the same time.) (It may stop here due to a POC error.)
+12V ON
F/W control
IDLE
+24V ON
+36V ON
+5V OFF
+12V OFF
+24V OFF
+36V OFF Panel SW OFF
ON
All outputs ON Power ON state
F/W control
Figure 9-9
Power ON/OFF state transition
9.10.4 Others
(1) Interlock release
When the printer's interlock is released, +36 V (CH1) outputs are forcibly turned OFF through a relay. The other voltages (+5 V, +12 V, +24 V) are not affected.
(2) Voltage variable trimmer
+5V (CH4) can be adjusted.

(3) Leakage breaker
Inserted into both AC line LIVE (HOT) and NEUTRAL (COLD). Rating: 100 to 240V, 15A
(4) Power supply fan
A +12 V Brussels UL standard fan is used.

(5) Overcurrent protection/overvoltage protection
All the outputs from the overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits are OFF when the +5 V protection circuit works, and +12 V/+24 V/+36 V output is OFF when the +12V/+24 V/+36 V protection circuit works. The output is restored by turning the power ON again.
9-31
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
9.11
Heater Unit
The heater system is composed of a heater panel, RLY board, front heater, print heater, rear heater and heater control firmware.
9.11.1 Block Diagram of Heater Unit

<Block diagram>
RLY board
AC
SW
Heater AC cable
Inlet
AC
Relay
SSR SSR AC SW
Front heater (AC) Print heater (AC) Rear heater (AC)
Breaker
SSR
AC SW
Zero cross
SSR On/Off
Temperature
Heater panel (HCP board)

+5V+12V
Serial communication
Printer AC cable
Print engine Power supply unit (PSU-XW1X)
Print engine Control board (IPB1) IP-6600 engine
9-32
9.11.2 Heater System Electric Unit Operations

Heater panel (HCP board) Controls the heater system, and implements the following functions: (1) Control of the front heater (2) Control of the print heater (heater for the platen) (3) Control of the rear heater (4) Display of the heater system status on LCD (5) Function settings from switches (6) Communication with the engine control board (IPB1 board) via a serial I/F (RS-232) [Heater temperature control] Reads heater temperatures from a temperature detecting device (thermistor) installed on each heater, and supplies the current to the heater if the actual temperature is lower than the set temperature (turning on SSR), or shuts off the current to the heater if the actual temperature is higher than the set temperature (turning off SSR). Power supply unit The power to operate the heater panel (HCP board) is supplied from the printer. 5VDC and 12VDC are used. When the printer is turned off, the heater panel is also turned off. The power is supplied to the heater from an independent cable. When the printer is turned off, the heater panel is turned off, and the relay inserted in the heater power line is turned off. This means when the printer is turned off, AC is not supplied to the relay and beyond. RLY board Implements the following functions: (1) ON/OFF of AC to the front heater with SSR (2) ON/OFF of AC to the print heater with SSR (3) ON/OFF of AC to the rear heater with SSR (4) Generation of zero cross signals of AC with a photo coupler, and supply of the signals to the heater panel Front heater Heat source to warm up the front paper guide. An aluminum foil heater is used. Print heater Heat source to warm up the platen. A linear heater is used. Rear heater Heat source to warm up the rear paper guide. An aluminum foil heater is used. Voltage changeover switch (SW) Switches voltage according to the supply voltage. Two-circuit system is used internally for each heater. Two circuits are connected in parallel when the heater is connected to 100VAC, or in series when the heater is connected to 200VAC. Three switches are provided for switching the circuit connection of each heater. Leakage breaker switch (circuit breaker) Shuts off AC when leakage occurs in the heater unit. It is normally used as the power switch of the heater.
9-33
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
9.11.3 Heater Firmware

The heater firmware runs on the heater panel (HCP board), and controls temperatures of the heaters, communicates with the engine board, manages the display on LCD, and recognizes switch inputs. The firmware is stored in the flash memory contained in the microcomputer on the heater panel (HCP board). It can also be uploaded from the IC card on the engine board.
9.11.4 Heater wiring diagram

The wiring diagram of the heater unit is shown below.
9.11.5 Wiring Diagram of Heater Unit

AC inlet specification Manufacturer: Model: Input: Power switch specification Manufacturer: Model: Input: Power supply specification Manufacturer: Model: Input: Output: Relay board specification (1) Function - Turns AC to the heaters on and off according to the control signals from the temperature controller. - Cuts AC when short-circuit occurs in the cable from the temperature controller or inside the heater (with a fuse). - Shuts off AC to SSR when the control signal cable from the temperature controller is not connected. Temperature controller specification Manufacturer: Yamatake Model: DMC10S2TV0200 Rated voltage: 24VDC (21.6VDC - 26.4VDC) Power consumption: Max 5W Operating environment: 0 to 50 C, 10 to 90%RH Storage environment: -20 to 70 C, 10 to 95%RH Weight: 200g (max) Dimension: 109 38 110mm PLC communication port: RS485
CHUOMUSEN R-301(00) 250VAC, 15A
Nihon Kaiheiki Ind. JW-L21RKK 125VAC/250VAC, 16A
IZUMI RS5R-A24 100VAC - 240VAC, 0.17A 24VDC, 0.3A, 7.5W
9-34
(1) Heater control Heater current ON/OFF signals are generated based on the result of comparison of the set temperature with the value input from the thermocouple on the heater, and output to SSR on the relay board. (2) Operation mode setting - Do not use the loader jack on the heater unit. (The loader jack is an interface used for settings of this unit from the PC.) - The heater unit is set on the operation panel through the RS485 interface. - The POWER lamp blinks when the power is supplied. (3) Switch setting - Do not use the loader jack on the heater unit. - Do not use the switch on the base for disconnecting communication. (4) Connection Operation panel specification Manufacturer: Horner Ireland Ltd. Model: SUP0500-01 Rated voltage: 24VDC (10VDC - 32VDC) Operating environment: 0 to 60 C, 5 to 85%RH Storage environment: -20 to 80 C Installation angle: 10 against the reference plane Weight: 320g Dimension: 179 111 60mm PLC communication port: RS485 (1) Set data is transferred to the temperature controller (Yamatake) when the power is turned on. (2) ON/OFF of functions and set temperature information entered in the operation panel is transferred to the temperature controller. (3) The current temperature information from the temperature controller is indicated on LCD. Heater unit specification Manufacturer: Power consumption: Temperature rise protect: AC connector: Thermistor connector:
H.E. Controls UK 700W@110V (finish) 350W@110V (front) 415W@110V (rear) Closed thermal protector 2-pin connector, male 2-pin connector, male
9.11.6 Heater Operations

(1) Heater operation conditions There are two conditions for the heater to retain the set temperature: (Condition 1) When the ON key on the heater operation panel is pressed for the first time after heater is turned on, the heater warms up to the set temperature even though the 24V power of the printer is off.
9-35
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Power is not supplied by pressing the ON key from the second time. (Condition 2) 24V power of the printer is on while the heater function is on. (2) 24V power ON conditions The heater temperature goes up as a result of turning on the printer under the conditions listed in the table below. If the auto power save mode is turned off from the printer operation panel, 24V is continuously supplied and the heater temperature is thereby kept at the set value all the time. No. 1 24V system operation At time of printer power ON 24V system operates.
When the printer is turned on from the operation panel when the rear breaker changes from OFF to ON. When print data is received from the host. When test printing is performed from the operation panel.
2.
During printing X motor operates. Y motor operates.
3.
4.
5.
During edge sensor operation Y motor operates. When media is replaced. When the paper hold lever is lowered. During cleaning Pump motor operates. Automatic cleaning at regular intervals Wipe motor operates. Manual cleaning via the operation panel. CAP solenoid operates. During winding Wind motor operates. When the sensor detects slack in paper.
9-36
(3)
Relation between printer operation and heater temperature

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 RLYOUT NC COM Relay 12PIN Relay 7PIN Connection signal P24V GND NC TX+/RX+ TX /RX GND ESSR+ ESSR NC FTP FTP+ RSSR+ RSSR NC RTP RTP+ NC Heater power supply Heater power supply -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Heater control panel Heater control panel Heater control panel Relay board PLUG F Relay board PLUG F -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Connector (F) Connector (F) Relay board PLUG R Relay board PLUG R -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Connector (P) Connector (P) -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -PIN +PIN (Thermocouple) (Thermocouple) -PIN +PIN (Thermocouple) (Thermocouple) 6PIN 2PIN TX+, RX+ TX- / RX0V 6PIN 2PIN Connected to: +V -V
Paper guide temperature Set temperature
Room temperature
F/R heater power ON
Start of printing
End of printing
Start of cleaning
End of cleaning
9-37
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
9.12
Dryer 64 Operation Outline

The following two elements contribute to dry printed paper on IP-6600 with solvent ink: Temperature (heat): Heat raises the saturated vapor pressure of solvent and accelerates evaporation. Wind: Air containing less solvent component accelerates the evaporation of solvent.
The basic principle of the dryer is based on these points, that is, to dry printed paper by applying warm air. Warm air is produced by warming the air with a heater in the dryer. In order to prolong the time to warm the air, the dryer has a structure to let the air go through an S-shaped path. To further dry the printed paper during winding, partition cloth is provided so that warm air can also go round the wound paper.
Printed paper
Heater unit
Air flow from the upper fans Air flow from the lower fans
Figure 9-10
Principal of dryer 64 operation
9-38
9.13
Electric Configuration of Dryer 64

Figure 9-11 shows the block diagram of the electric unit of dryer 64. The dryer is mainly composed of the parts to turn on and off AC, control board, power supply unit, and fans.
Power LED
Temp. control LED
Temp. control volume
Upper fan air flow control volume
Breaker SW Power supply unit DC24V SSR DC24V Temp. control circuit Upper fan air flow control circuit
Upper fans (9)
Relay
Thermo stat
Timer
FAN Electric Cooling fan Heater PCB-ASSY-DRY
Lower fan air flow control circuit
Lower fans (4)

Thermistor
Lower fan air flow control volume
Figure 9-11
Block diagram of dryer 64 electric unit
9-39
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
9.13.1 Electric Unit Operations

DRY board ((PCB-ASSY-DRY) Controls dryer 64, and implements the following functions: (1) Control of air flow of the upper nine fans (2) Control of air flow of the lower four fans (3) Control of the temperature of warm air discharged from the dryer [Air flow control] The air flow control circuits for the upper and lower fans have the same configuration. DC fans are used to create a current of air. By varying the DC fan drive voltage, the number of revolutions thereby the air flow change. When the air flow control volume is turned to the leftmost position, the drive voltage becomes the lowest state (approx. 14V), and the air flow is set to the lowest. When the volume is turned to the rightmost position, the drive voltage becomes the highest state (approx. 23V), and the air flow is set to the highest. [Temperature control] A thermistor for detecting warm air temperatures is mounted at the warm air outlet. The temperature detected is compared with the voltage set with the temperature control volume, and if the set temperature is higher than the detected temperature, the heater drive current is turned on (i.e., SSR control signals are on), or if the set temperature is lower than the detected temperature, the heater drive current is turned off (i.e., SSR control signals are off). Electric unit Generates 24VDC used on the DRY board. Timer Turns off the heater function after a certain period of time. The timer has three states: (1) The timer switch is off The ON signal (24VDC) to the relay is passed through, and the relay is turned on. (2) The timer switch is on, and the set time is not up The ON signal (24VDC) to the relay is passed through, and the relay is turned on. (3) The timer switch is on, and the set time is up. The ON signal (24VDC) to the relay is shut off, and the relay is turned off, thereby the heater current is shut off. Heater Produces warm air as the heat source. A pipe heater with a fin called sheathed heater is used. SSR Implements the heater current ON/OFF function to bring warm air to the set temperature. The SSR ON/OFF signal is output from the DRY board. Relay Implements the heater current OFF function with the timer/thermostat.
9-40
Thermostat Shuts off the heater current when the upper metal plate of the heater reaches 80 C to prevent abnormally high temperatures caused by the failure of the dryer. The thermostat has two states: (1) When 80 C is detected The device is in the open state and shuts off the ON signal (24VDC) to the relay. The relay is therefore in the off state, and shuts off the heater current. (2) Under 80 C The device is short-circuited, and passes the ON signal (24VDC) through to the relay, allowing the relay to be on. Leakage breaker switch Shuts off AC when leakage occurs in the dryer. It is normally used as the power switch. LEDs Two LEDs are provided for the dryer: (1) Power LED Lights when 24VDC on the DRY board is on. (2) Temperature set LED Lights when warm air reaches the temperature set with the volume. Actuators and sensors Motors
Name Upper fan Type DC motor Voltage 24V Control Variable drive voltage (14V 23V) Variable drive voltage (14V 23V) Always ON Error & action Shut down by a poly switch when overcurrent occurs. Shut down by a poly switch when overcurrent occurs. None Remark Simultaneous control of 9 fans Simultaneous control of 4 fans
Lower fan Electric Cooling fan
DC motor DC motor
24V 24V
Sensors
Name Temp. sensor Thermostat Type Thermistor Thermostat Sensing method Comparator input L (High temperature) H (Low temperature) Cable break H Abnormally low temp. Heater is shut off Thermostat OFF, heater OFF
Input devices
Name Temp. set volume Upper fan air flow set volume Lower fan air flow set volume Type Volume Volume Volume Sensing method Comparator input Regulator IC input Regulator IC input Cable break Detection of open, heater OFF
L L
Remark
9-41
Appendix
Appendices 3 to 13 show the electric connection diagrams of IP-6600 and dryer 64.
Appendix-1
Appendix-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix 1
Electrical connection diagram (Power Interface)

Power supply unit
PCB-ASSY-IPB1
AC inlet
AC cable
Micro switch PCB-ASSY-WIM1 PCB-ASSY-VDD2 Interlock cable (64)
Interlock
Micro switch
* Interlock switch (far side of Y rail, with green head) PS-CNT-CBL(64)
Control IC(NVRAM)
DC-CBL-24V/36V(64)
DC-CBL-5V/12V(64)
Heater panel
ENG-INF cable assy.
Appendix-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix 2
Electrical connection diagram (Carriage I/F)
Carriage cable 64 (for maintenance) Carriage cable 64 (for maintenance) Carriage cable 64 (for maintenance) Carriage cable 64 (for maintenance)
PCB-ASSY-IPB1
PCB-ASSY-ICB1
Appendix-4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix 3
Electrical connection diagram (Head Interface)
Head cable 64 (for maintenance) (x 6) Head cable (64) Head cable (64)
Head (x 6)
Appendix-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix 4
Electrical connection diagram (Carriage)
PCB-ASSY-ICB1 Cooling fan Carriage fan relay cable assy. (Cooling fan) (Relay connector) Cooling fan Carriage fan relay cable assy. (Cooling fan) Edge sensor assy. (Edge sensor) (Relay connector)
Linear encoder assy.
(Linear encoder)
Appendix-6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix 5
Electrical connection diagram (Sensor)

Sensor cable assy. (64) Suction fan assy.
(Wipe side)
Suction fan assy.

(Center)
Suction fan assy.

(Cap side)
(Relay connector)
Ambient temperature thermistor
Relay switch assy.
Cancel switch assy.
Photo sensor assy.
Photo sensor assy. Paper sensor assy.
Paper sensor assy.
Suction fan assy. (Cooling fan R in cabinet) Suction fan assy. (Cooling fan L in cabinet) Micro switch 2 Waste ink tank cable assy. (64)
(Relay connector) * Mount the joint from outside of the electric box. Motor (cap) assy.
Cartridge cover R switch assy. * Detection of presence of the waste ink tank
Solenoid assy. (64)
Air release solenoid (K, LC, LM) Air release solenoid (C, M, Y)
Capping unit
Solenoid assy. (64)
Motor (wiper) assy.
Wiping unit Switch (wiper) assy.
Micro switch (F/w)
Micro switch (F/w)
Appendix-7
* Interlock switch (near side of Y rail, with red head)
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix 6
Electrical connection diagram (Motor/Roll Up Unit/Operation Panel)

DC motor cable assy. (64) Y drive motor 64 assy.
Feed motor assy.
Motor encoder cable assy. (64)
Internal winding cable assy. (64) Winding relay cable assy. Winding unit cable 64
Gear motor assy.
Winder motor
Media end sensor assy.
Winder sensor cable (64)
Photo micro sensor SLACK SENSOR
(Pressure terminal)
(Pressure terminal) Winder switch assy.
Operation panel SII Panel cable 64
Appendix-8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix 7
Electrical connection diagram (Ink L)

* Mount the relay connector from outside of the electrical box. Ink cartridge L cable 64 Ink cartridge relay cable
(Relay connector)
Cartridge cover relay cable
Micro switch 2 (Cartridge cover R switch assy.)
(Relay connector) Ink motor L cable Ink motor relay cable Motor assy. (SP pump)
Motor assy. (SP pump)
Motor assy. (SP pump) (Relay connector)
Ink motor sensor relay cable
(Relay connector)
Sub tank sensor cable (L)
Sub tank sensor relay cable (F) Full sensor assy. * Sub tank sensor Upper: Full Lower: Half L to R: 1 to 3
Full sensor assy.
(Relay connector)
Full sensor assy.
Sub tank sensor relay cable (H) Half sensor assy.
Half sensor assy.
(Relay connector)
Half sensor assy.
Appendix-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix 8
Electrical connection diagram (Ink R)

* Mount the relay connector from outside of the electrical box. Ink cartridge R cable 64 Ink cartridge relay cable
(Relay connector)
Cartridge cover relay cable
Micro switch 2 (Cartridge cover R switch assy.)
(Relay connector) Ink motor R cable Ink motor relay cable Motor assy. (SA pump)
Motor assy. (SA pump)
Motor assy. (SA pump) (Relay connector)
Ink motor sensor relay cable
(Relay connector)
Sub tank sensor cable (R)
Sub tank sensor relay cable (F) Full sensor assy. * Sub tank sensor Upper: Full Lower: Half L to R: 4 to 6
Full sensor assy.
(Relay connector)
Full sensor assy.
Sub tank sensor relay cable (H) Half sensor assy.
Half sensor assy.
(Relay connector)
Half sensor assy.
Appendix-10
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix 9
Electrical connection diagram (Heater System)

Relay with relay terminal block AC relay cable assy.
AC inlet assy. AC cable
Circuit breaker
RLY-CTL cable assy.
(Relay connector)
RLY-B-AC cable assy. Heater panel RLY-CTL relay cable assy.
Paper guide F (64) assy. Voltage changeover switch assy. Print heater thermocouple Fuse (heater)
RLY-B-CTL cable assy.
* Voltage changeover switch (Relay connector) Paper guide R (64) assy. Print heater thermocouple Fuse (heater)
* Voltage changeover switch (Relay connector) Platen (64) assy. Print heater thermocouple Fuse (heater)
* Voltage changeover switch (Relay connector)
THRM cable assy.
Appendix-11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix 10 Dryer 64 electric connection diagram (AC Circuit)
Breaker Cable ground
Terminal block Short-circuit metal
Power supply cable
N seal Short-circuit metal
Power supply unit
Connection diagram of this side is shown in the next page.
Relay
For OFF timer/ Relay for shutoff at abnormal temperatures
SSR for temperature control
Terminal block
Terminal block
Short-circuit metal
Short-circuit metal
Appendix-12
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix 11 Dryer 64 electric connection diagram (DC Circuit)

Power supply unit Connection diagram of this side is shown in the previous page. Temperature and air flow control board
(Upper row, cap side)
(Relay connector)
Timer
Thermostat Heat contraction tub
Warm air fan air flow control volume switch Mold knob Lower fan air flow control volume switch Mold knob
Timer socket
Connection diagram of this side is shown in the previous page.
Relay
(No polarity) Heat contraction tube Warm air detection thermistor
(Upper row, wipe side)
(Lower row, cap side)
Heat contraction tub Warm air temperature control volume switch Mold knob
Connection diagram of this side is shown in the previous page.
(Lower row, wipe side)
Heat contraction tube Warm air temperature set indicator LED (GREEN)
Power on indicator LED (ORANGE)
Appendix-13

Seiko IP 6600 Plotter Service Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Seiko IP 6600 Plotter Service Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

IP-6600 Color Ink Jet Printer Maintenance Manual

Seiko I Infotech Inc.

U00087444000 U00087444001 U00087443802

February March April

2004 2004 2005

Section 1 Maintenance Procedure Overview

Inspection and Maintenance

Section 3 Maintenance Mode Menu Operations and Functions

Section 4 Troubleshooting (General)

Section 5 Troubleshooting (Engine and SCSI Controllers)

Section 6 Troubleshooting (Dryer 64)

Section 7 Parts Replacement (Disassembly/Reassembly)

7.3.12.13 Terminal protecting insulator set

Maintenance Procedure Overview

Maintenance Procedure Overview

Periodic inspection and maintenance

Periodic inspection/When a problem occurs

Maintenance that is performed when a problem occurs

Check the state of the plotter (problem, complaint, etc.).

Print a drawing to verify that there is no problem.

Verify that the problem has been eliminated.

Maintenance work flowchart

Table 1-1 List of required tools (1/2)

1 1 1 1 set As required As required

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 1 Maintenance Procedure Overview

Table 1-1 List of required tools (2/2)

1 1 set 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 set 1 set 1 set 1 set 1 set 6 6 6

External Views and Names of Parts

<Front of the printer>

External views and names of parts (Front)

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 1 Maintenance Procedure Overview

<Rear of the printer>

SCSI controller Network controller

Printer power supply

Heater power supply

External views and names of parts (Rear)

Height direction: 1700 (Unit: mm)

Inspection and Maintenance

Details of inspection and maintenance are described in the subsequent pages.

Daily inspection and maintenance

1 Capping Unit Cleaning

#CAP CLEANING >

all (six) caps with the cotton swab.

Clean he edge and periphery of the upper surface of the cap.

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 2 Inspection and Maintenance

2 Wiper Blade Cleaning

#WIPER CLEANING >

The wiper blade will come up for cleaning.

Open the rear cover and the wiper cover.

wiper to the position as it was.

Wiper sponge cleaning

Wiper sponge Syringe

5 Waste Ink Bottle Disposal

Every one month inspection and maintenance 1 Head Cleaning

SIIT CONFIDENTIAL Section 2 Inspection and Maintenance

1 Checking waste ink bottle

#SERVICE >SERVICE CLEAN

2. Press the screen.

keys in order in the password input

1 Checking waste ink bottle

#SERVICE >HEAD WASH

3 Ink Charge After Head Washing

Matte (1) Banner (1) BLT_B (*1)